Manual 2 Fiberhome

FONST 5000 U Series
Packet Enhanced OTN Equipment
Product Description
Version: A
Code: MN000002058
FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.
April 2014
Thank you for choosing our products.
We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.

We will provide you with comprehensive technical support
and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales
representative, service representative or distributor for any
help needed at the contact information shown below.
Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China

Zip code: 430073
Tel: +6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)
+91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia)
+593 4 501 4529 (for South America)
Fax: +86 27 8717 8521
Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com
Legal Notice
are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

(Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome)
All brand names and product names used in this document are used for
identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.
All rights reserved
No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be

reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written permission from FiberHome.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Preface
Related Documentation
Document Description
FONST 5000 U Series Packet Introduces the product’s functions and features, protection
Enhanced OTN Equipment principles, network modes and applications, and technical
Product Description specifications.
Describes the equipment’s structures, functions, signal

FONST 5000 U Series Packet
flows, specifications, and technical parameters in terms of
Enhanced OTN Equipment
its hardware components (i.e. the cabinet, the subrack,
Hardware Description
cards, and cables).

Enhanced OTN Equipment Discusses the important issues for the commissioning of
100G System Commissioning the equipment, the commissioning flow, and the methods.
Specification
Introduces the rules and methods for the configuration of

FONST 5000 U Series Packet various services and functions through service
Enhanced OTN Equipment Start- management, NE configuration and card configuration via
up and Configuration Guide the OTNM2000; gives some typical configuration examples
and operation procedures.
FONST 5000 U Series Packet Gives a detailed introduction to testing projects, testing
Enhanced OTN Equipment methods, and inspection and acceptance standards of the
Testing Specification product.
FONST 5000 U Series Packet Gives a detailed introduction to notices of fault

Enhanced OTN Equipment management, fault isolating methods as well as procedures
Troubleshooting Guide and methods of fault management.
FONST 5000 U Series Packet Gives a detailed description of routine maintenance items
Enhanced OTN Equipment and operation procedures in terms of day, week, month,
Routine Maintenance quarter and year.
FONST 5000 U Series Packet Describes classification and category of alarm and
Enhanced OTN Equipment performance indicators and their binding relationships, and
Alarm and Performance lists definitions, causes and management of each alarm
Reference and performance.
FONST 5000 U Series Packet Introduces the preparations before installation, installation
Enhanced OTN Equipment flows, as well as the requirements for the installation
Installation Guide environment.
I
Document Description

Briefs how to install the equipment, connect and lay out its
Enhanced OTN Equipment
wires and cables using figures.
Quick Installation Guide
Introduces the functions of the PDP (3000064); briefs how
PDP850A User Guide
to install the PDP, connect and lay out its wires and cables.

PDP296B User Guide

PDP1063A User Guide
Quick Installation Guide for the

Introduces the installation methods of the 21-inch cabinet
21-inch Cabinet (340mm-deep)
(340 mm-deep).
(404000282 to 404000285)
Quick Installation Guide for the

Introduces the installation methods of the 21-inch cabinet
21-inch Cabinet (680mm-deep)
(680 mm-deep).
(404000305 to 404000308)
Packet Enhanced OTN Introduces functions, related concepts, configuration

Equipment ASON User Manual methods and maintenance methods of ASON.
Includes four manuals, i. e., product description, operation
e-Fim OTNM2000 Element guide, routine maintenance and installation guide, all of
Network Management System which are aimed at introducing common and fundamental
Manual Set contents of the OTNM2000 for a better understanding and
proficient use of the network management system.
II
Version
Version Description
A Initial version.
Intended Readers
This manual is intended for the following readers:
u Planning and designing engineers
u Commissioning engineers
u Operation and maintenance engineers
To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:
u OTN technology
u PTN technology
u Data communication technology
u Optical fiber communication technology
u SDH communication theory
u Ethernet technology
III
IV
Conventions
Terminology Conventions
Terminology Convention
FONST 5000 U60; FONST 5000 U40; FONST 5000 U30;
FONST 5000 U Series
FONST 5000 U20; FONST 5000 U10
OTNM2000 FiberHome e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management System
8TN1 8-Port 2.5G Normalization Service Card

4TN2 4-Port 10G Normalization Line Card
10TP2 10-Port 10GE Service Card
20TP2 20-Port 10GE Service Card
1TN3 1-Port 40G Normalization Service Card
1TO3 1-Port 40G OTN Service Card
4LN2 4-Port 10G Normalization Line Card
10IL2 10-Port 10G Integration Line Card
UXU2 Universal Switch Unit 2

MST2 8-Port Any Service Transponder Card
OTU2E Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with Enhanced FEC
OTU2S 10G Bidirectional Optical Transponder Card with Super FEC
2-Port 10G Bidirectional Optical Transponder Card with

2OTU2S
Super FEC
OTU2F 10G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC
V
4-Port 10G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card With
OTU3E
Enhanced FEC
4-Port 10G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card With
OTU3E (coherent)
Enhanced FEC (Coherent)
OTU3S 43G Bidirectional Transponder Card with Super FEC
43G Bidirectional Transponder Card with Super FEC

OTU3S (coherent)
(Coherent)
OTU3F 43G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC
OTU4S 100Gb/s Enhanced FEC Unit (PM-QPSK)
100G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with Enhanced

OTU4E
FEC (PM-QPSK,10×10G)
OTU4F 100G Regenerator with EFEC
BMD2 Band Multiplexer and Distribution Unit (2 Band)
BMD2P 2 Bands Multiplexer and Distribution Unit with Pre amplifiers
BMD2PP 2 Bands Multiplexer and Distribution Unit with 2 Preamplifiers
OMU48_E 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)
OMU40_E 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)
ODU48_E 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)
ODU40_E 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)
48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

VMU48_E
Attenuator (C,E)

VMU40_E
Attenuator (C,E)
OMU48_O 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C, O)
OMU40_O 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C, O)
ODU48_O 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)
ODU40_O 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)

VMU48_O
Attenuator (C,O)

VMU40_O
Attenuator (C,O)
OMU8 8 Ch Optical Coupler Card
ODU8 8 Ch Optical Splitter Card
VI
ITL50 50GHz Grid Interleaved Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card
OSCAD 1510 / 1550 Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card
Optical Wavelength Selective Switch Multiplexer Card

WSS8M
(50GHz, 1×9)
Optical Wavelength Selective Switch Demultiplexer Card

WSS8D
(50GHz, 1×9)
OA Optical amplification card
PA Pre-amplifier Card
OLP (1+1) Optical Line Protection Card (1+1)
OLP (1:1) Optical Line Protection Card (1:1)
OCP Optical Channel Protection Card
OMSP Optical Multiplex Section Protection Card
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel Card
EOSC Enhanced Optical Supervisory Channel Card
OPM4 4 Ch Optical Performance Monitor Card
OPM8 8 Ch Optical Performance Monitor Card
CCU Central Control Card

EMU NE Management Card
FCU Frame Control Unit Card

EFCU Enhanced Frame Control Unit Card
PWR Power Card
AIF/AIF1/AIF2 Auxiliary Interface Card
VII
Symbol Conventions
Symbol Meaning Description
Note Important features or operation guide.
Possible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic

Caution
interruption or loss.
Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.
➔ Jump Jumps to another step.
Cascading
→ Connects multi-level menu options.
menu
Bidirectional
↔ The service signal is bidirectional.
service
Unidirectional
→ The service signal is unidirectional.
service
VIII
Contents
Preface...................................................................................................................I
Related Documentation ...................................................................................I
Version ..........................................................................................................III
Intended Readers ..........................................................................................III
Conventions .................................................................................................. V
1 Overview .....................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Product Features ...........................................................................1-2
1.2 Product Positioning........................................................................1-3
1.3 Product Architecture ......................................................................1-4
1.4 Application Scenario ......................................................................1-6
2 Functions and Features ...............................................................................2-1
2.1 Functions of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products .......................2-2
2.2 Service Types and Access Capabilities ..........................................2-3
2.2.1 Service Type....................................................................2-3

2.2.2 Service Access Capability................................................2-4
2.3 Wavelength Tunability....................................................................2-5
2.4 Optical Power Management ...........................................................2-5
2.4.1 Automatic Equalization of Channel Optical Power ............2-5

2.4.2 Automatic Equalization of Line Power...............................2-6
2.4.3 APR Function ................................................................2-10
2.5 Data Features..............................................................................2-11
2.5.1 Service Types................................................................2-11

2.5.2 QoS Features ................................................................2-15
2.5.3 OAM Features ...............................................................2-17
2.6 Protection Capability ....................................................................2-19
2.7 Fault Isolation and Analysis..........................................................2-20
2.7.1 Integrated Maintenance .................................................2-20

2.7.2 Online EMS Help ...........................................................2-20
2.7.3 Flexible OTN Overhead Configuration ............................2-20
2.7.4 Online Performance Monitoring ......................................2-24
2.8 Clock Features ............................................................................2-26
2.8.1 Physical-Layer Clock .....................................................2-26

2.8.2 PTP Clock .....................................................................2-28
2.9 ASON Features ...........................................................................2-31
2.10 Intelligent Fan ..............................................................................2-31
2.11 PIC Features ...............................................................................2-32
2.11.1 System Model of the 100 Gbit/s Optical Fiber Bandwidth 2-32
2.12 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s Transmission Solutions ..........2-36
2.12.1 100 Gbit/s Transmission Technology ..............................2-36

2.12.2 40 Gbit/s Transmission Technology ................................2-38
2.12.3 10 Gbit/s Transmission Technology ................................2-39
2.12.4 Multi-rate Hybrid Transmission .......................................2-40
2.13 Card Self-Booting ........................................................................2-41
2.14 Remote Upgrade .........................................................................2-41
3 Product Structure.........................................................................................3-1
3.1 Hardware Structure........................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Cabinet (680 mm Deep) ...................................................3-2

3.1.2 Cabinet (340 mm Deep) ...................................................3-3
3.1.3 PDP (3000064)................................................................3-5
3.1.4 PDP (3000068)................................................................3-6
3.1.5 PDP (3000082)................................................................3-8
3.1.6 DCM..............................................................................3-10
3.1.7 Subrack.........................................................................3-11
3.1.8 Equipment Layout..........................................................3-40
3.1.9 Card Overview...............................................................3-47
3.1.10 Tributary Interface Unit...................................................3-57
3.1.11 Electrical Cross-connect Unit .........................................3-58
3.1.12 Line Interface Unit..........................................................3-58
3.1.13 PIC Unit.........................................................................3-58
3.1.14 Optical Transponder Unit ...............................................3-59
3.1.15 Optical Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Unit ..................3-60
3.1.16 Dynamic Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer Unit...................3-63
3.1.17 Optical Amplification Unit ...............................................3-63
3.1.18 Optical Protection Unit ...................................................3-64
3.1.19 Optical Spectrum Analysis Unit ......................................3-65
3.1.20 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit...................................3-65
3.1.21 System Connection and Management Unit.....................3-66
3.2 Software Architecture...................................................................3-69
3.2.1 Overview .......................................................................3-69

3.2.2 Communication Protocol and Interface ...........................3-69
3.2.3 BMU Software ...............................................................3-70
3.2.4 EMU Software ...............................................................3-70
3.2.5 EMS Software................................................................3-71
4 Configuration and Application.......................................................................4-1
4.1 OTM ..............................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Function ..........................................................................4-2

4.1.2 Related Functional Unit....................................................4-2
4.1.3 Common Configuration Principles ....................................4-3
4.1.4 Composition and Signal Flow ...........................................4-7
4.2 FOADM .......................................................................................4-11
4.2.1 Function ........................................................................4-12

4.2.2 Related Functional Unit..................................................4-12
4.2.3 Common Configuration Principles ..................................4-12
4.2.4 Composition and Signal Flow .........................................4-14
4.3 ROADM.......................................................................................4-15
4.3.1 Function ........................................................................4-15

4.4 OLA.............................................................................................4-27
4.4.1 Function ........................................................................4-28

4.5 PIC..............................................................................................4-31
4.5.1 Function ........................................................................4-32
5 Protection Implementation ...........................................................................5-1
5.1 Equipment-level Protection ............................................................5-2
5.1.1 1+1 Protection for the NE Management Card ...................5-2

5.1.2 M+N Protection for the Cross-connect Card......................5-4
5.1.3 1+1 Protection for the Power Card....................................5-7
5.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Input Power Supply ......................5-11
5.2 Network-level protection...............................................................5-13
5.2.1 OCh 1+1 Protection .......................................................5-15

5.2.2 OCh m:n Protection .......................................................5-17
5.2.3 OCh Ring Protection ......................................................5-22
5.2.4 ODUk 1+1 Protection .....................................................5-26
5.2.5 ODUk m:n Protection .....................................................5-29
5.2.6 ODUk Ring Protection....................................................5-34
5.2.7 Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection...................5-38
5.2.8 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection............................5-41
5.2.9 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection.........................5-43
5.2.10 Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1 Protection.....................................5-45
5.2.11 Ethernet LAG Protection ................................................5-48
5.3 Network Management Information Protection ...............................5-49
6 Application of Service Grooming ..................................................................6-1
6.1 Optical Layer Grooming .................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Application of FOADM .....................................................6-2

6.1.2 Application of ROADM .....................................................6-6
6.2 Electrical Layer Grooming ............................................................6-11
6.2.1 Application of Electrical Layer Grooming ........................6-12

6.2.2 Examples of Electrical Grooming (OTN) .........................6-13
6.2.3 Examples of Electrical Grooming (PIC)...........................6-22
7 About ASON................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Background and Introduction of the ASON .....................................7-2
7.1.1 Background of the ASON .................................................7-2

7.1.2 Development of the ASON ...............................................7-3
7.1.3 Introduction of the ASON .................................................7-3
7.2 Architecture of the ASON System ..................................................7-4
7.3 Basic Concepts of the ASON .........................................................7-5
7.4 ASON Solution ............................................................................7-12
7.4.1 Product System .............................................................7-12

7.4.2 Solution .........................................................................7-14
7.4.3 System Features ...........................................................7-15
7.4.4 Architecture of Intelligent Software SmartWeaver ...........7-17
7.5 ASON Functions..........................................................................7-18
7.5.1 Automatic Discovery of Link Resource ...........................7-18

7.5.2 Protection and Recovery Function..................................7-20
7.5.3 Differentiated Services ...................................................7-21
7.5.4 End-to-End Service Configuration Function ....................7-22
7.5.5 Network Management Function......................................7-23
7.5.6 Network Maintenance Optimization Function ..................7-23
8 Management and Maintenance ....................................................................8-1
8.1 Monitoring and Management Module .............................................8-2
8.2 Communication and Maintenance Interfaces ..................................8-3
8.3 Optical Supervisory Channel Management.....................................8-7
8.4 Electrical Supervisory Channel Management .................................8-9
8.5 Alarm and Performance Event Management ................................8-10
8.6 Network Performance Monitoring .................................................8-12
8.7 Safety Management.....................................................................8-13
8.8 TCM ............................................................................................8-14
9 Technical Specification.................................................................................9-1
9.1 Frequency and Wavelength ...........................................................9-2
9.2 Specifications of Tributary Interface Cards......................................9-4
9.2.1 Specifications of the xTN1 Cards .....................................9-4

9.2.2 Specifications of the xTN2 Cards .....................................9-5
9.2.3 Specifications of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card ........................9-7
9.2.4 Specifications of the 1TO3 Card.......................................9-8
9.2.5 Specifications of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card............................9-9
9.2.6 Specifications of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card..........................9-10
9.3 Specifications of Line Interface Cards...........................................9-12
9.3.1 Specifications of the xLN2 Cards....................................9-12

9.3.2 Specifications of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card ..........................9-13
9.4 Specifications of Cross-Connect Cards ........................................9-14
9.5 Specifications of PIC Cards..........................................................9-15
9.5.1 Specifications of the 10IL2 Card.....................................9-15

9.5.2 Specifications of the BMD2 Card....................................9-17
9.5.3 Specifications of the BMD2P Card..................................9-18
9.5.4 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card ...............................9-20
9.6 Specifications of the Optical Transponder Cards...........................9-21
9.6.1 Specifications of the MST2 Card ....................................9-22

9.6.2 Specifications of the OTU2S Card ..................................9-24
9.6.3 Specification of the 2OTU2S Card..................................9-25
9.6.4 Specifications of the OTU2E Card ..................................9-27
9.6.5 Specification of the OTU2F Card ....................................9-28
9.6.7 Specification of the OTU3S Card (Coherent) ..................9-32
9.6.9 Specification of the OTU3E Card (Coherent) ..................9-36
9.6.10 Specification of the OTU3F Card ....................................9-37
9.6.13 Specifications of the OTU4F Card ..................................9-43
9.7 Specifications of Optical Layer Cards ...........................................9-44
9.7.1 Specifications of the OMU Series Card...........................9-44

9.7.2 Specification of the VMU Series Card.............................9-45
9.7.3 Specifications of the ODU Series Card ...........................9-46
9.7.4 Specifications of the ITL50 Card.....................................9-48
9.7.5 Specifications of the OSCAD Card .................................9-49
9.7.6 Specifications of the WSS8M Card.................................9-50
9.7.7 Specifications of the WSS8D Card .................................9-51
9.7.8 Specifications of the OA Card ........................................9-52
9.7.9 Specifications of the PA Card .........................................9-53
9.7.10 Specifications of the OCP Card ......................................9-54
9.7.11 Specifications of the OMSP Card ...................................9-55
9.7.12 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card .............................9-55
9.7.13 Specifications of the OLP (1:1) Card...............................9-57
9.7.14 Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card .........................9-58
9.7.15 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card .......................9-61
9.8 Specifications of System Connection and Management Cards......9-62
9.8.1 Specifications of the CCU Card ......................................9-62

9.8.2 Specifications of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card ...................9-63
9.8.3 Specifications of the PWR Card .....................................9-63
9.8.4 Specifications of the Auxiliary Terminal Card ..................9-64
9.9 DCM Specifications .....................................................................9-64
9.10 Power Consumption of Cards.......................................................9-65
9.11 Mechanical Dimensions ...............................................................9-68
10 Equipment Standards and Environmental Requirements ............................10-1
10.1 Optical Interface Performance Standards .....................................10-2
10.2 Power Supply Requirements........................................................10-2
10.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility ......................................................10-2
10.4 Environment Requirements..........................................................10-3
10.4.1 Storage Environment .....................................................10-3

10.4.2 Transportation Environment ...........................................10-5
10.4.3 Working Environment.....................................................10-7
11 Product Safety Standards ..........................................................................11-1
11.1 Relevant ITU-T Standards............................................................11-2
11.2 Relevant IEEE Standards ............................................................11-5
11.3 Laser Safety Standards................................................................11-6
11.4 Relevant Safety Standards...........................................................11-6
11.5 Relevant EMC Standards.............................................................11-7
11.6 Relevant Environment Standards .................................................11-7
11.7 Grounding Standards...................................................................11-9
11.8 Noise Standards ..........................................................................11-9
11.9 Fire Prevention Standards............................................................11-9
11.10 Relevant International Standards .................................................11-9

Appendix A Abbreviations .......................................................................... A-1
Figures
Figure 1-1 Network Positioning of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products ........1-3
Figure 1-2 Overall Subrack View of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products......1-4
Figure 1-3 Transport Plane Structure ..............................................................1-5
Figure 1-4 Application Scenarios of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products .....1-6
Figure 2-1 Flowchart of Power Equalization in Fixed Gain Mode......................2-7
Figure 2-2 APR Function ..............................................................................2-11
Figure 2-3 E-Line Service Instance ...............................................................2-12
Figure 2-4 E-LAN Service Instance ...............................................................2-13
Figure 2-5 E-Tree Service Instance...............................................................2-14
Figure 2-6 Network Diagram of the SM and PM Planning and Configuration
Example ......................................................................................2-21
Figure 2-7 SM Configuration and Planning ....................................................2-22
Figure 2-8 PM Configuration and Planning ....................................................2-22
Figure 2-9 Network Diagram of TCMi Configuration and Planning..................2-23
Figure 2-10 TCMi Configuration and Planning.................................................2-23
Figure 2-11 PTP Master-slave Clock Hierarchy...............................................2-30
Figure 2-12 100G Optical Fiber Bandwidth System Model...............................2-33
Figure 2-15 Typical Application of the 100 Gbit/s Transport Solution ................2-36
Figure 2-16 Typical Application of the 40 Gbit/s Transport Solution ..................2-38
Figure 2-17 Typical Application of the 10 Gbit/s Transport Solution ..................2-39
Figure 2-18 Hybrid Transmission of 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s Signals in the Non-
coherent System..........................................................................2-40
Figure 2-19 Hybrid Transmission of 100 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 10 Gbit/s Signals in
the Coherent System ...................................................................2-41
Figure 3-1 Appearance of the Cabinet (680 mm Deep) ....................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Appearance of the Cabinet (340 mm Deep) ....................................3-4
Figure 3-3 Appearance of the PDP (3000064).................................................3-6
Figure 3-4 Appearance of the PDP (3000068).................................................3-8
Figure 3-5 Appearance of the PDP (3000082)...............................................3-10
Figure 3-6 The DCM Slide Rail .....................................................................3-11
Figure 3-7 Appearance of the FONST 5000 U60 Subrack .............................3-13
Figure 3-8 Slot Allocation of the FONST 5000 U60 Subrack ..........................3-15
Figure 3-9 Appearance of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 Subrack........................3-18
Figure 3-10 Slot Allocation of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 Subrack ....................3-19
Figure 3-19 Appearance of the COTP (3030036) Subrack...............................3-36
Figure 3-20 Slot Allocation of the COTP (3030036) Subrack ...........................3-37
Figure 3-21 Appearance of the COTP (3030105) Subrack...............................3-39
Figure 3-22 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000 U60..................................3-41
Figure 3-23 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 ............................3-42
Figure 3-28 Equipment Layout of the COTP....................................................3-47
Figure 3-29 Naming Rules of the Electrical Layer Cards..................................3-48
Figure 3-30 Example of Tributary Interface Card Names .................................3-48
Figure 3-31 Example of Line Interface Card Names ........................................3-48
Figure 3-32 Example of the 10IL2 Card Name.................................................3-49
Figure 3-33 Card Appearance ........................................................................3-50
Figure 3-34 Positioning of Common Cards in the OTN System ........................3-56
Figure 3-35 Positioning of Common Cards in the PIC System .........................3-57
Figure 3-36 Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Architecture of a 96-channel
System ........................................................................................3-60
Figure 3-37 Application of the OA and PA Cards in the System........................3-64
Figure 3-38 System Software Architecture ......................................................3-69
Figure 3-39 OTNM2000 Software Architecture................................................3-72
Figure 4-1 Composition and Signal Flow of the 48-Channel OTM System........4-8
Figure 4-2 Composition and Signal Flow of the 96-Channel OTM System......4-10
Figure 4-3 Composition and Signal Flow of FOADM......................................4-14
Figure 4-4 2-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Relevance &
Direction Relevance)....................................................................4-22
Direction Irrelevance)...................................................................4-23
Figure 4-6 2-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Irrelevance &
Figure 4-8 9-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Irrelevance &
Figure 4-9 Composition and Signal Flow of OLA ...........................................4-31
Figure 4-10 Composition and Signal Flow of PIC System ................................4-36
Figure 5-1 Active and Standby Protection of the Power Cards in the FONST 5000
U60 2.0 Subrack ............................................................................5-7
U60 Subrack..................................................................................5-8
U40 Subrack..................................................................................5-8
U30 Subrack..................................................................................5-9
U20 Subrack................................................................................5-10
U10 Subrack................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-7 Active and Standby Protection of the Power Cards in the COTP
Subrack.......................................................................................5-11
Figure 5-8 PDP (3000064) Power Input Protection ........................................5-12
Figure 5-11 Composition and Signal Flow of OTM...........................................5-14
Figure 5-12 OCh 1+1 Protection .....................................................................5-17
Figure 5-13 OCh 1:2 Protection (Normal) ........................................................5-20
Figure 5-14 OCh 1:2 Protection (Switching) ....................................................5-21
Figure 5-15 OCh Ring Protection ....................................................................5-24
Figure 5-16 Near End Switching in OCh Ring Protection .................................5-25
Figure 5-17 Far End Switching in OCh Ring Protection....................................5-26
Figure 5-18 ODUk 1+1 Protection ...................................................................5-29
Figure 5-19 ODUk 1:2 Protection (Normal)......................................................5-32
Figure 5-20 ODUk 1:2 Protection (Switching) ..................................................5-33
Figure 5-21 ODUk Ring Protection..................................................................5-36
Figure 5-22 Near End Switching in ODUk Ring Protection ...............................5-37
Figure 5-23 Remote End Switching in ODUk Ring Protection ..........................5-38
Figure 5-24 Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection.................................5-40
Figure 5-25 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection..........................................5-42
Figure 5-26 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection.......................................5-45
Figure 5-27 Optical Line 1:1/1+1 Protection ....................................................5-47
Figure 5-28 Port Aggregation Protection .........................................................5-49
Figure 5-29 Network Management Information Protection in Ring Network
Mode ...........................................................................................5-50
Figure 5-30 Working and Protection Supervisory Channels - Normal ...............5-51
Figure 5-31 Working and Protection Supervisory Channels - Faulty.................5-52
Figure 6-1 Application of FOADM – Network Diagram .....................................6-2
Figure 6-2 Application of FOADM – Service Demand ......................................6-3
Figure 6-3 Application of FOADM – Signal Flow at Station A ...........................6-4
Figure 6-4 Application of FOADM – Signal Flow at Station B ...........................6-5
Figure 6-5 Application of ROADM – Network Diagram.....................................6-6
Figure 6-6 Application of ROADM – Service Demand......................................6-7
Figure 6-7 Application of ROADM – Dropping Signal Flow at Station A ............6-8
Figure 6-8 Application of ROADM – Adding Signal Flow at Station A ...............6-9
Figure 6-9 Application of ROADM – Signal Flow at Station B .........................6-11
Figure 6-10 Pass-through of Client Side Services at Local Station ...................6-12
Figure 6-11 Service Add/Drop Line on the Client Side .....................................6-13
Figure 6-12 Pass-Through of Line Side Services at Local Station ....................6-13
Figure 6-13 Network Diagram – Example of Electrical Layer Grooming Application
(OTN) ..........................................................................................6-14
Figure 6-14 Service Demand – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN) ..6-15
Figure 6-15 Card Slot Configuration at Stations A and E – Electrical Layer
Grooming Application (OTN) ........................................................6-16
Figure 6-16 Card Slot Configuration at Stations B and D – Electrical Layer
Grooming Application (OTN) ........................................................6-17
Figure 6-17 Card Slot Configuration at Station C – Electrical Layer Grooming
Application (OTN) ........................................................................6-17
Figure 6-18 Signal Flow at Station A – Electrical Layer Grooming Application
(OTN) ..........................................................................................6-18
Figure 6-19 Signal Flow at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming Application
(OTN) ..........................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-20 Signal Flow at Station C – Electrical Layer Grooming Application
(OTN) ..........................................................................................6-22
Figure 6-21 Network Diagram – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)...6-23
Figure 6-22 Service Requirement – Electrical Layer Grooming Application
(PIC)............................................................................................6-24
Figure 6-23 Card Slot Configuration at Stations A and C – Electrical Layer
Grooming Application (PIC)..........................................................6-24
Figure 6-24 Card Slot Configuration at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming
Application (PIC)..........................................................................6-24
Figure 6-25 Signal Flow at Station A – Electrical Layer Grooming Application
(PIC)............................................................................................6-25
Figure 6-26 Signal Flow at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming Application
(PIC)............................................................................................6-26
Figure 7-1 Structure of the ASON System .......................................................7-4
Figure 7-2 ASON Network Model....................................................................7-6
Figure 7-3 Positioning of the TE Link...............................................................7-7
Figure 7-4 LSP ...............................................................................................7-8
Figure 7-5 The Minimum Node Number ..........................................................7-9
Figure 7-6 The Lowest Link Cost ..................................................................7-10
Figure 7-7 Load Balancing............................................................................7-11
Figure 7-8 Product Relationships on Each Layer...........................................7-13
Figure 7-9 OTN ASON Solution ....................................................................7-15
Figure 7-10 Architecture of the Intelligent Software SmartWeaver ...................7-17
Figure 7-11 Misconnection of Optical Fibers....................................................7-20
Figure 7-12 Network Traffic Balancing ............................................................7-25
Figure 8-1 Monitoring and Management Module .............................................8-2
Figure 8-2 Signal Flow in the OSC for the Chain Network ................................8-8
Figure 8-3 Signal Flow in the ESC for the Chain Network ..............................8-10
Figure 8-4 The OTU Frame Structure............................................................8-15
Figure 8-5 TCM Function ..............................................................................8-15
Tables
Table 2-1 Functions of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products .......................2-2

Table 2-2 Service Types and Service Rates...................................................2-3
Table 2-3 Access Capabilities of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products ........2-4
Table 2-4 OAM Standards Supported by the FONST 5000 U Series of
Products ......................................................................................2-18
Table 2-5 Protection Types Supported by the FONST 5000 U Series of
Products ......................................................................................2-19
Table 2-6 Monitorable Performance Items of Services..................................2-24
Table 2-7 Monitorable Performance Items of Systems..................................2-25
Table 3-1 Specifications of Cabinet (680 mm Deep) .......................................3-3
Table 3-2 Specifications of Cabinet (340 mm Deep) .......................................3-4
Table 3-3 Mapping Relationship Between the Slots and Cards of the FONST
5000 U60 Subrack .......................................................................3-16
5000 U60 2.0 Subrack .................................................................3-20
5000 U40 Subrack .......................................................................3-25
Table 3-6 Mapping Relationship between the Slots and Cards of the FONST
5000 U30 Subrack .......................................................................3-29
5000 U20 Subrack .......................................................................3-32
5000 U10 Subrack .......................................................................3-35
Table 3-9 Mapping Relationship between the Slots and Cards of the COTP
(3030036) Subrack ......................................................................3-38
Table 3-10 Descriptions of Components of the COTP (3030105) Subrack ......3-39
Table 3-11 Card Appearance and Dimensions of the Service Cards...............3-51
Table 3-12 Card Classification.......................................................................3-55
Table 3-13 Main Functions of the PIC Unit .....................................................3-59
Table 3-14 Functions of OMU Series, VMU Series, ODU Series Cards...........3-61
Table 3-15 Functions of the WSS8M / WSS8D Cards ....................................3-63
Table 3-16 Functions of the Optical Protection Unit Cards..............................3-64
Table 3-17 Functions of the System Connection and Management Unit .........3-67
Table 4-1 OTM Related Functional Units .......................................................4-2
Table 4-2 List of Compulsory and Optional OTM Cards ..................................4-3
Table 4-3 ROADM Related Functional Units ................................................4-16
Table 4-4 Compulsory Cards for the ROADM...............................................4-18
Table 4-5 Basic Concepts of the ROADM ....................................................4-20
Table 4-6 List of Compulsory and Optional OLA Cards.................................4-28
Table 4-7 PIC Related Functional Units .......................................................4-32
Table 4-8 List of Compulsory and Optional PIC Cards..................................4-33
Table 5-1 1+1 Protection for the NE Management Cards of the FONST 5000 U
Series of Products .........................................................................5-2
Table 5-2 1+1 Protection Parameters of the NE Management Cards ..............5-3
Table 5-3 M+N Protection for the Cross-connect Cards of the FONST 5000 U
Series of Products .........................................................................5-5
Table 5-4 M+N Protection Parameters of the Cross-connect Cards of the
FONST 5000 U Series of Products.................................................5-5
Table 5-5 Parameters for the OCh 1+1 Protection ........................................5-15
Table 5-6 Parameters for the OCh m:n Protection ........................................5-18
Table 5-7 Parameters for the OCh Ring Protection.......................................5-22
Table 5-8 Parameters for the ODUk 1+1 Protection......................................5-27
Table 5-9 Parameters for the ODUk m:n Protection......................................5-30
Table 5-10 Parameters for the ODUk Ring Protection ....................................5-34
Table 5-11 Parameters for Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection .........5-39
Table 5-12 Parameters for Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection ..................5-41
Table 5-13 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection.......................................5-44
Table 5-14 Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1 Protection Parameters ................................5-46
Table 5-15 Ethernet LAG Protection Parameters ...........................................5-48
Table 7-1 Calculation of Load Balance for Choosing a Route .......................7-11
Table 7-2 Modules and Functions of the Intelligent Software SmartWeaver ..7-18
Table 7-3 Protection and Recovery Functions of the ASON..........................7-20
Table 7-4 Differentiated Service Functions...................................................7-22
Table 8-1 List of Management and Maintenance Interfaces ............................8-3
Table 8-2 Service Performance Monitoring on the Client Side ......................8-12
Table 8-3 Signal Performance Monitoring on the WDM Side ........................8-13
Table 9-1 Frequencies and Wavelengths at the CO and CE Bands ..................9-2
Table 9-2 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN1 Cards .........................9-4
Table 9-3 Mechanical Parameters of the xTN1 Cards.....................................9-5
Table 9-4 Power Consumption of the xTN1 Cards..........................................9-5
Table 9-5 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN2 Cards .........................9-5
Table 9-6 Mechanical Parameters of the xTN2 Cards.....................................9-6
Table 9-7 Power Consumption of the xTN2 Cards..........................................9-6
Table 9-8 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card ............9-7
Table 9-9 Mechanical Parameters of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card .......................9-7
Table 9-10 Power Consumption of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card.............................9-7
Table 9-11 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TO3 Card ...........................9-8
Table 9-12 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TO3 Card ......................................9-8
Table 9-13 Power Consumption of the 1TO3 Card ...........................................9-9
Table 9-14 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card................9-9
Table 9-15 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card .........................9-10
Table 9-16 Power Consumption of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card ..............................9-10
Table 9-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card..............9-10
Table 9-18 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card .........................9-11
Table 9-19 Power Consumption of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card ..............................9-12
Table 9-20 Optical Interface Specifications of the xLN2 Cards........................9-12
Table 9-21 Mechanical Parameters of the xLN2 Cards...................................9-13
Table 9-22 Power Consumption of the xLN2 Cards ........................................9-13
Table 9-23 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card on the WDM
Side.............................................................................................9-13
Table 9-24 Mechanical Parameters of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card .........................9-14
Table 9-25 Power Consumption of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card ..............................9-14
Table 9-26 Mechanical Parameters of the Cross-connect Cards ....................9-15
Table 9-27 Power Consumption of the Cross-connect Cards..........................9-15
Table 9-28 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10IL2 Card.........................9-15
Table 9-29 Mechanical Parameters of the 10IL2 Card ....................................9-17
Table 9-30 Power Consumption of the 10IL2 Card .........................................9-17
Table 9-31 Specifications of the BMD2 Card..................................................9-17
Table 9-32 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2 Card ...................................9-18
Table 9-33 Power Consumption of the BMD2 Card ........................................9-18
Table 9-34 Specifications of the BMD2P Card................................................9-18
Table 9-35 Specifications of the BMD2P Card's Amplifier...............................9-19
Table 9-36 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2P Card.................................9-19
Table 9-37 Power Consumption of the BMD2P Card......................................9-20
Table 9-38 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card .............................................9-20
Table 9-39 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card's Amplifier ............................9-20
Table 9-40 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2PP Card ..............................9-21
Table 9-41 Power Consumption of the BMD2PP Card ...................................9-21
Table 9-42 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the STM-
16 / OTU1 Service) ......................................................................9-22
Table 9-43 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the GE
Service) .......................................................................................9-22
Table 9-44 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the MST2 Card 9-23
Table 9-45 Mechanical Parameters of the MST2 Card ...................................9-23
Table 9-46 Power Consumption of the MST2 Card.........................................9-23
Table 9-47 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the OTU2S Card..........9-24
Table 9-48 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2S
Card ............................................................................................9-24
Table 9-49 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2S Card .................................9-25
Table 9-50 Power Consumption of the OTU2S Card ......................................9-25
Table 9-51 Specifications of Wavelength Division Side Optical Interfaces on the
2OTU2S Card..............................................................................9-25
2OTU2S Card..............................................................................9-26
Table 9-53 Mechanical Parameters of the 2OTU2S Card ...............................9-26
Table 9-54 Power Consumption of the 2OTU2S Card ....................................9-26
Table 9-55 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2E
Card ............................................................................................9-27
Table 9-56 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2E
Card ............................................................................................9-27
Table 9-57 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2E Card .................................9-28
Table 9-58 Power Consumption of the OTU2E Card ......................................9-28
OTU2F Card................................................................................9-28
Table 9-60 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2F Card .................................9-29
Table 9-61 Power Consumption of the OTU2F Card ......................................9-29
Table 9-62 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S
Card ............................................................................................9-29
Card ............................................................................................9-30
Table 9-64 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3S Card..........9-30
Table 9-65 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3S Card ................9-31
Table 9-68 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card
(Coherent) ...................................................................................9-32
Table 9-69 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card
(Coherent) ...................................................................................9-32
Table 9-70 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)................9-33
Table 9-71 Power Consumption of the OTU3S Card (Coherent).....................9-33
Card ............................................................................................9-33
Card ............................................................................................9-34
Table 9-74 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3E Card..........9-35
Table 9-75 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3E Card ................9-35
Table 9-78 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card
(Coherent) ...................................................................................9-36
Table 9-79 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card
(Coherent) ...................................................................................9-36
Table 9-80 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3E Card (Coherent)................9-37
Table 9-81 Power Consumption of the OTU3E Card (Coherent).....................9-37
OTU3F Card................................................................................9-37
Table 9-83 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3F Card..........9-38
Table 9-86 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4S
Card ............................................................................................9-39
Card ............................................................................................9-40
Card ............................................................................................9-41
Card ............................................................................................9-42
Table 9-94 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4F
Card ............................................................................................9-43
Table 9-97 Specifications of the OMU Series Cards .......................................9-44
Table 9-98 Mechanical Parameters of OMU Series Cards..............................9-45
Table 9-99 Power Consumption of the OMU Series Cards .............................9-45
Table 9-100 Specifications of the VMU Series Cards .......................................9-45
Table 9-101 Mechanical Parameters of VMU Series Cards ..............................9-46
Table 9-102 Power Consumption of the VMU Series Cards..............................9-46
Table 9-103 Specifications of the ODU Series Cards .......................................9-46
Table 9-104 Mechanical Parameters of ODU Series Cards ..............................9-47
Table 9-105 Power Consumption of the ODU Series Cards..............................9-47
Table 9-106 Specifications of the ITL50 Card...................................................9-48
Table 9-107 Mechanical Parameters of the ITL50 Card....................................9-48
Table 9-108 Power Consumption of the ITL50 Card .........................................9-48
Table 9-109 Specifications of the OSCAD Card ...............................................9-49
Table 9-110 Mechanical Parameters of the OSCAD Card ................................9-49
Table 9-111 Power Consumption of the OSCAD Card .....................................9-49
Table 9-112 Specifications of the WSS8M Card...............................................9-50
Table 9-113 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8M Card................................9-50
Table 9-114 Power Consumption of the WSS8M Card .....................................9-50
Table 9-115 Specifications of the WSS8D Card ...............................................9-51
Table 9-116 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8D Card ................................9-51
Table 9-117 Power Consumption of the WSS8D Card .....................................9-51
Table 9-118 Specifications of the OA Card ......................................................9-52
Table 9-119 Mechanical Parameters of the OA Card........................................9-52
Table 9-120 Power Consumption of the OA Card.............................................9-53
Table 9-121 Specifications of the PA Card .......................................................9-53
Table 9-122 Mechanical Parameters of the PA Card ........................................9-54
Table 9-123 Power Consumption of the PA Card .............................................9-54
Table 9-124 Specifications of the OCP Card ....................................................9-54
Table 9-125 Mechanical Parameters of the OCP Card .....................................9-54
Table 9-126 Power Consumption of the OCP card ...........................................9-54
Table 9-127 Specifications of the OMSP Card .................................................9-55
Table 9-128 Mechanical Parameters of the OMSP Card ..................................9-55
Table 9-129 Power Consumption of the OMSP card ........................................9-55
Table 9-130 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card ...........................................9-55
Table 9-131 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1+1) Card.............................9-56
Table 9-132 Power Consumption of the OLP (1+1) Card..................................9-56
Table 9-133 Specifications of the OLP (1:1) Card.............................................9-57
Table 9-134 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1:1) Card..............................9-57
Table 9-135 Power Consumption of the OLP (1:1) Card ...................................9-58
Table 9-136 Optical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card .............9-58
Table 9-137 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card (2048
kbit/s) ..........................................................................................9-58
Table 9-138 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card (2048
kHz) ............................................................................................9-59
Table 9-139 Clock Interface Specifications of the OSC (Electrical Layer) / EOSC
Card ............................................................................................9-60
Table 9-140 GE Optical Interface Specifications of the OSC (Electrical Layer) /
EOSC Card .................................................................................9-60
Table 9-141 Mechanical Parameters of the OSC / EOSC Card ........................9-61
Table 9-142 Power Consumption of the OSC / EOSC Card..............................9-61
Table 9-143 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card .....................................9-61
Table 9-144 Mechanical Parameters of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card ......................9-62
Table 9-145 Power Consumption of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card ...........................9-62
Table 9-146 Mechanical Parameters of the CCU Card .....................................9-62
Table 9-147 Power Consumption of the CCU Card ..........................................9-62
Table 9-148 Mechanical Parameters of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card ..................9-63
Table 9-149 Power Consumption of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card........................9-63
Table 9-150 Mechanical Parameters of the PWR Card ....................................9-63
Table 9-151 Power Consumption of the PWR Card..........................................9-63
Table 9-152 Mechanical Parameters of the Auxiliary Terminal Card..................9-64
Table 9-153 Power Consumption of the Auxiliary Terminal Cards .....................9-64
Table 9-154 G.652 Optical Fiber–DCM Specifications......................................9-65
Table 9-155 G.655 Optical Fiber–DCM Specifications......................................9-65
Table 9-156 Mechanical Parameters of the DCM .............................................9-65
Table 9-157 Power Consumption of Cards.......................................................9-66
Table 9-158 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cabinets .......................................9-68
Table 9-159 Mechanical Dimensions of the Subracks ......................................9-69
Table 9-160 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cards ...........................................9-69
Table 10-1 Climate Requirements (Storage Environment)..............................10-3
Table 10-2 Concentration Requirements for Mechanically Active Substances
(Storage Environment) .................................................................10-4
Table 10-3 Concentration Requirements for Chemically Active Substances
(Storage Environment) .................................................................10-4
Table 10-4 Sinusoidal Vibration Requirements (Storage Environment) ...........10-4
Table 10-5 Climate Requirements (Transportation Environment)....................10-5
(Transportation Environment).......................................................10-5
(Transportation Environment).......................................................10-6
Table 10-8 Mechanical Requirements (Transportation Environment) ..............10-6
Table 10-9 Climate Requirements (Working Environment) .............................10-7
(Working Environment) ................................................................10-8
(Working Environment) ................................................................10-8
Table 10-12 Mechanical Requirements (Working Environment) .......................10-8
Table 11-1 Component Materials...................................................................11-8
1 Overview
The FONST 5000 U series of products are packet optical transport equipment
based on the unified switching system offered by FiberHome Telecommunication
Technologies Co., Ltd. (referred to as FiberHome hereinafter). The following
describes the product features, product positioning,product architecture and
application scenarios of the FONST 5000 U series of products.
Product Features
Product Positioning
Product Architecture
Application Scenario
Version: A 1-1
FONST 5000 U Series Packet Enhanced OTN Equipment Product Description
1.1 Product Features
The FONST 5000 U series of product provide the following features:
u Uses a unified switching platform to integrate the PTN and OTN functions, and
simultaneously supports the VC/Packet/ODUk switching in the same cross-
connect unit.
u Provides ultra-large capacity electrical cross-connect capability. A single

subrack supports a maximum of 12.8 Tbit/s cross-connect capacity, 25.6 Tbit/s
cross-connect capacity after upgrade, and supports free grooming of ultra-
capacity, multi-grained electrical cross-connect.
u Supports the access of services at any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 100 Gbit/s using
any protocol. Bandwidth is allocated based on the service requirements,
thereby maximizing the transmission bandwidth efficiency.
u Owns the flexibility of fine-grained services of the PTN equipment and mass
transmission capacity of the OTN equipment.
u Supports various OAM management functions, increases the network

transparency, provides quick fault isolation, and saves maintenance costs.
u Reduces the network delay and jitter to the maximum extent, and ensures the
quality of key services by properly allocating and monitoring network resources
based on QoS.
u Provides complete network-level and equipment-level protection mechanisms,

which ensures the service security to the maximum extent.
u Supports time synchronization and frequency clock synchronization for cards,

nodes, and networks.
u Uses ultra-energy-efficient technologies to increase power supply and

consumption efficiency while reducing energy consumption by adopting the
intelligent fan with a B-T type air duct and excellent chip and system designs.
u Seamlessly connects with the FONST 1000 / 3000 / 4000 / 5000 to uniformly
manage the network from end to end.
u Supports the packet and OTN hybrid service mode, achieves seamless
combination of rigid tunnels of the ODUk and flexible tunnels of the packet
equipment, so as to enhance the performance and transmission efficiency of
the equipment.
1-2 Version: A
1 Overview
1.2 Product Positioning
The FONST 5000 U series of products can internetwork together to form a packet
optical transport product hierarchy in the unified switching system, covering the
backbone layer, core layer, distribution layer, and access layer applications; and can
also internetwork with the OTN, PTN, and SDH equipment to provide complete
transport network solutions, as shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Network Positioning of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products
Version: A 1-3
1.3 Product Architecture
Figure 1-2 shows the overall product architecture of the FONST 5000 U series of
products.
Figure 1-2 Overall Subrack View of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products
As shown in Figure 1-2, the FONST 5000 U series of products consist of a transport
plane, a management plane, a control plane, and a network planning system. Three
planes cooperate with the network planning system to transport intelligent services.
u The transport plane is the principal subsystem of the products. The transport
plane performs end-to-end transport of services based on the calculated route.
The corresponding entity is the hardware components. Figure 1-3 shows the
structure of the transport plane.
1-4 Version: A
1 Overview
Figure 1-3 Transport Plane Structure
The transport plane contains an electrical layer (left dotted frame in Figure 1-3)
and an optical layer (right dotted frame in Figure 1-3). The electrical layer and
optical layer perform end-to-end transport of services together.
4 The electrical layer includes the service adaptation unit, cross-connect unit,
and line adaptation unit, which perform the cross-connect grooming of the
sub-wavelength services.
4 The optical layer includes the optical add / drop multiplexing unit, the
optical multiplexing / demultiplexing unit and the optical amplification unit to
implement the cross-connect grooming and transport of the wavelength
services.
u The management plane manages the transport plane and the control plane,
and provides users with a graphical service configuration interface. This plane
implements coordination and cooperation of all planes. The entity of the
management plane is the OTNM2000 / OTNM2100, which provides
management functions defined in ITU-T M.3010, including performance
management, fault management, configuration management, and security
management.
u The control plane collects route information and calculates specific routes of
services. The entity of the control plane is relevant cards that have the control
plane function.
Version: A 1-5
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the loading of the control plane.
By loading the control plane, the FONST 5000 U series of product can achieve
automatic resource discovery and automatic end-to-end service configuration,
provide QoS assurance at different levels, and facilitate the service setup.
1.4 Application Scenario
Convergence of multiple service network nodes: Ethernet services of the GE/XGE

are transmitted through the existing PTN network. When the growing bandwidth
demand reaches 40G or 100G, the services are transmitted to the FONST 5000 U
series product network by ODUk/ODUflex.
This networking mode has the following advantages:
u The service bearing mode is simple and easy for management and monitoring.
u The transmission layer is simple and the ODUk/ODUflex can achieve flexible
mapping and adaptation of all services.
Figure 1-4 Application Scenarios of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products
1-6 Version: A
2 Functions and Features
The following describes various functions and features of the FONST 5000 U series
of products.
Functions of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products
Service Types and Access Capabilities
Wavelength Tunability
Optical Power Management
Data Features
Protection Capability
Fault Isolation and Analysis
Clock Features
ASON Features
Intelligent Fan
PIC Features
10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s Transmission Solutions
Card Self-Booting
Remote Upgrade
Version: A 2-1
2.1 Functions of the FONST 5000 U Series of

Products
The FONST 5000 U series of products include the FONST 5000 U60, the FONST
5000 U60 2.0, the FONST 5000 U40, the FONST 5000 U30, the FONST 5000 U20,
and the FONST 5000 U10. Table 2-1 describes the functions of each product.
Table 2-1 Functions of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products
FONST
FONST 5000 FONST FONST 5000 FONST 5000 FONST 5000
Equipment Name 5000 U60 2.
U60 5000 U40 U30 U20 U10
0
Dimensions 1447×563×5- 1575×563×- 1166×566×- 1677×566×- 1152×566×2-
535×566×295
(H × W × D) (mm) 70 570 570 295 95
Number of Slots 88 92 80 58 42 18
Cross-connect
12.8T 12.8T 10.4T 8T 5.2T 2.4T
Capacity
Maximum
Transmission 200G
Capacity per Slot
Maximum
Number of
48 / 96
Supported
Channels
Wavelength
1529.16nm to 1567.14nm
Range
Type of
Supported SDH, SONET, Ethernet, SAN, OTN, and video services
Service
Line Rate 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s
u Equipment-level protection: NE management card 1+1 protection, cross-connect card M+N

protection, power supply card 1+1 protection, and input power 1+1 protection
Type of
u Network-level protection: OCh 1+1 protection, OCh m:n protection, OCh Ring protection,
Supported
ODUk 1+1 protection, ODUk m:n protection, ODUk Ring protection, optical channel 1+1
Protection
wavelength protection, optical channel 1+1 route protection, 1+1 optical multiplex section
protection, optical line 1:1/1+1 protection, Ethernet LAG protection
2-2 Version: A
2.2 Service Types and Access Capabilities
The following describes the service types and access capabilities of the FONST
5000 U series of products.
2.2.1 Service Type
The FONST 5000 U series of products support accessing various types of services.
The types and rates of the supported services are shown in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Service Types and Service Rates
Reference
Service Service Type Service Rate
Standard
STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s
STM-4 622.08 Mbit/s ITU-T G.707
SDH services STM-16 2.5 Gbit/s ITU-T G.691
STM-64 9.95 Gbit/s ITU-T G.957
STM-256 39.81 Gbit/s

OC-3 155.52 Mbit/s
OC-12 622.08 Mbit/s GR-253-CORE
SONET services OC-48 2.5 Gbit/s GR-1377-CORE
OC-192 9.95 Gbit/s ANSI T1.105
OC-768 39.81 Gbit/s

FE 125 Mbit/s
GE 1.25 Gbit/s
IEEE 802.3z
10GE WAN 9.95 Gbit/s
Ethernet services IEEE 802.3a
10GE LAN 10.31 Gbit/s
IEEE 802.3u
40GE 41.25 Gbit/s
100GE 103.12 Gbit/s
ESCON 200 Mbit/s
FICON 1.06 Gbit/s
FC100 1.06 Gbit/s
ANSI X3.296
SAN services FC200 2.12 Gbit/s
ANSI X3.303
FC400 4.25 Gbit/s
FC800 8.5 Gbit/s
FC1200 10.51 Gbit/s
OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s ITU-T G.709
OTN services
OTU2 10.71 Gbit/s ITU-T G.959.1
Version: A 2-3
Table 2-2 Service Types and Service Rates (Continued)
Reference
Service Service Type Service Rate
Standard
OTU2e 11.10 Gbit/s
OTU3 43.02 Gbit/s
OTU4 111.8 Gbit/s
DVB 270 Mbit/s EN 50083-9
Video and other
SMPTE 292M
services HDTV 1.49 Gbit/s
SMPTE 259M
2.2.2 Service Access Capability
The FONST 5000 U series of products include the FONST 5000 U60, the FONST
5000 U60 2.0, the FONST 5000 U40, the FONST 5000 U30, the FONST 5000 U20,
and the FONST 5000 U10. Table 2-3 describes the access capability of each
system.
Table 2-3 Access Capabilities of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products
Maximum Quantity Accessible

Service Type U60 U60 2.0 U40 U30 U20 U10
Card
Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack
100GE, OTU4 2 2×64 2×64 2×52 2×40 2×26 2×12
STM-256, OC768,
2 2×64 2×64 2×52 2×40 2×26 2×12
OTU3, OTU3e, 40GE
10GE LAN, 10GE
WAN, STM-64,
20 20×64 20×64 20×52 20×40 20×26 20×12
OC192, OTU2,
OTU2e, FC800/1200
FC400 8 8×64 8×64 8×52 8×40 8×26 8×12
STM-16, OTU1,
16 16×64 16×64 16×52 16×40 16×26 16×12
FC200
GE, STM-1/4, FC100 32 32×64 32×64 32×52 32×40 32×26 32×12
2-4 Version: A
2.3 Wavelength Tunability
The line interface card provides wavelength tuning function, and can use any of the
96 wavelengths with 50 GHz spacing in the C-band.
Overview
Wavelength-tunable cards help to avoid the fixed wavelength conversion mode of

traditional line interface cards. This type of cards can be used as normal cards to
make service provisioning and wavelength assignment easier. They can also be
used as spare cards to replace the faulty cards with different wavelengths, so as to
reduce the quantity and the cost of spare parts.
Function Implementation
The wavelength tunable modules are integrated on the line interface cards to
perform wavelength tuning.
2.4 Optical Power Management
The following describes the optical power management functions of the FONST
5000 U series of products, including automatic channel optical power equalization,
automatic line optical power equalization and APR.
2.4.1 Automatic Equalization of Channel Optical Power
The channel optical power automatic equalization function is designed to reduce

operational difficulty and complexity in the work of commissioning and subsequent
network maintenance.
Overview
Either the gain variation inherent in amplification cards or the application of

cascaded amplification cards may result in significant difference in channel power,
OSNR degradation and limited transmission distance of the DWDM system.
Version: A 2-5
The OPM (spectrum analysis) units are introduced on the transmit end, receive end,
and OLA station to ensure the qualified output power, OSNR and flatness of
cascaded amplification cards.
The OPM unit monitors the optical power of each wavelength output at the
amplification card. The VMU/WSS unit compares the optical power of each
wavelength with the reference value. If the optical power of a wavelength is greater
or smaller than the reference value, the VMU/WSS unit adjusts the EVOA
attenuation value of the single-wavelength signal where the deviation occurs,
implementing power equalization of various wavelengths.
2.4.2 Automatic Equalization of Line Power
The product performs line power automatic detection function. The gain control of
amplification cards and the built-in EVOA work in cooperation to reduce
maintenance difficulty and complexity, and to perform line power automatic
equalization function.
The product provides two line power automatic equalization modes, i.e. the fixed
gain mode and the line attenuation mode. A combined configuration may apply to
the omni-directional power equalization of a single station, a single span, and the
line.
2.4.2.1 Fixed Gain Mode
The fixed gain mode is specific to a single amplification card, and is not applicable
to network-level system adjustment.
Overview
Users only need to set the expected output power of an amplification card via the
network management system. The amplification card will adjust its built-in VOA
attenuation automatically to ensure that the actual output power is equal to the
expected output power. The expected output power of an amplification card can be
worked out according to the module type and the amplified channel number of this
card.
2-6 Version: A
Figure 2-1 shows the process of power equalization in fixed gain mode. Network
management operators can calculate the output expectation value and set this
value on the network management system according to the module type of the
amplification cards and the quantity of the amplified channels. The amplification
cards ascertain whether the actual value deviates from the expectation value,
whether EVOA is locked, and whether EVOA is adjusted to a value exceeding the
limit in sequence until the deviation of the expectation value and actual value is
within the required threshold range.
Figure 2-1 Flowchart of Power Equalization in Fixed Gain Mode
Note:
To perform the power equalization in the fixed gain mode, users need to
set the EVOA mode of the amplification card to Tracing. Otherwise, the
EVOA cannot be performed.
Version: A 2-7
2.4.2.2 Line Attenuation Mode
The system ascertains whether an abnormality of the line occurs and calculates the
abnormal attenuation value (not caused by channel increment or decrement).
Based on the attenuation value, the amplification card adjusts EVOA attenuation
volume to guarantee the optical power stability of the entire line.
Overview
The following are two algorithms used by the system:
u One is to compare the difference between the input optical power of the local
amplification card and the output optical power of the previous amplification
card with the reference attenuation of the line. If not equal, abnormal
attenuation of the line has occurred.
u In the other way, the local amplification card ascertains whether the actual
output power equals to the value calculated using the formula Ptotal (dBm) =
Psingle (dBm) + 10lgN (dB).
4 Ptotal: The total optical power of the system
4 Psingle: The input optical power of a wavelength of the system
4 N: The total number of commissioned waves
Note:
Either channel increment / decrement or line degradation can result in

line power changes. Power changes caused by channel increment /
decrement, however, do not influence the OSNR performance. Therefore,
line power equalization (optical power of the amplification card) is not
necessary.
2-8 Version: A
The line optical power equalization procedures corresponding to the two algorithms
are the same, both of which include single span adjustment and line adjustment.
When the line power is abnormal, the system starts single span adjustment first. If
the single span adjustment has reached its limit, or optical power equalization is
required by multiple nodes, the line adjustment will be started.
The process for adjusting the single span is as follows:
1. Ascertain whether abnormal attenuation occurs. See previous introduction to

the calculation methods.
2. Ascertain whether the abnormal attenuation value exceeds the threshold:

Compare the abnormal attenuation value obtained from the calculation in the
previous step with the set threshold value. If the value is smaller than the
threshold value, save the data for further adjustment; if the value is larger than
the threshold value, go to the next step.
3. Execute EVOA adjustment: The amplification card ascertains whether the

EVOA attenuation value can be achieved. If not, the amplification card will
implement the line adjustment; if yes, it will adjust the EVOA attenuation value
accordingly.
4. Save the current actual attenuation value of the line as the reference value for
the next adjustment.
Note:
The reference value refers to the actual attenuation value of single span
after project startup or the previous single span adjustment.
The process of attenuation adjustment for a line is described as follows:
1. Ascertain whether the line equalization should be performed: In the single span
equalization, when an abnormal power occurs on a succeeding node, the
system will report to the head node. If multiple nodes report the abnormal
power or a node reports an EVOA threshold crossing alarm (equalization
disabled), the system will start the line equalization.
Version: A 2-9
2. Make the EVOA adjustment for the amplification card at the head node
following the procedure of single span adjustment.
3. Upon completion of the head node adjustment, notify the succeeding nodes to
make adjustment in turn until the end node of the line.
4. Complete the adjustment: The end node delivers the equalization completion
report.
2.4.3 APR Function
The APR function refers to the automatic optical power reduction function of the
amplification card.
Overview
When fiber cables are cut off, strong output power signals of previous amplification
cards will be exposed. To prevent strong light from burning maintainers' eyes, the
system will reduce optical power of amplification cards in the influenced optical
transmission sections immediately and resume the normal work automatically after
fault elimination.
As shown in Figure 2-2, when fiber-cut occurs on lines between amplification card 1
and card 2, and at the same time card 2 at Station B detects an LOS alarm, Station
B will reduce the output power of amplification card 3 to a value within a safety
range (below 0 dBm). Consequently, the reduced output power of the amplification
card 3 will lead to an LOS alarm detected by amplification card 4 at Station A, and
Station A will reduce the output power of amplification card 1 to a value within a
safety range (below 0 dBm) as well.
After the fault is cleared, the optical amplification cards 1 and 3 can work properly.
2-10 Version: A
Figure 2-2 APR Function
2.5 Data Features
The following describes the data features of the FONST 5000 U series of products,
including the service types, QoS features, and OAM features.
2.5.1 Service Types
The FONST 5000 U series of products provide three patterns of Ethernet services.
u Ethernet private line service, i.e., the E-Line service.
u Ethernet private network service, i.e., the E-LAN service.
u Ethernet convergence service, i.e., the E-Tree service.
2.5.1.1 E-Line Service
The following describes the pattern of the E-Line service provided by the FONST
5000 U series of products with a service instance. Figure 2-3 shows the service
instance of the E-Line service provided by the FONST 5000 U series of products.
E-Line Service Scenario
Company X has branches in city A and city C, company Y has branches in city B
and city C, and company Z has branches in city A and city B. Branches of company
X, company Y, and company Z in different cities need to exchange data.
Version: A 2-11
Implementation of E-Line Service Pattern
The FONST 5000 U series of products can provide private line services for
company X, company Y, and company Z. Service data of different companies can
be identified based on ports. Therefore, the communication requirement is met and
service data can be completely isolated.
Figure 2-3 E-Line Service Instance
2.5.1.2 E-LAN Service
The following describes the pattern of the E-LAN service provided by the FONST
instance of the E-LAN service provided by the FONST 5000 U series of products.
E-LAN Service Scenario
The headquarters of company K are located in city C. Branch X of company K is set

in city A and city B, and branch Y is set in city A, city B, and city C. Branches X and
Y do not have business transaction and data isolation is required. The headquarters
and each branch have communication requirements and the headquarters need to
access the Internet.
2-12 Version: A
Implementation of E-LAN Service Pattern
The FONST 5000 U series of products can provide the E-LAN service for company
K. Different VLAN tags are used to identify service data of different branches,
thereby achieving data interconnection and data isolation between branches. The
network access data of the headquarters can also be isolated from the internal
service data by using the VLAN tags.
Figure 2-4 E-LAN Service Instance
2.5.1.3 E-Tree Service
The following describes the pattern of the E-Tree service provided by the FONST
instance of the E-Tree service provided by the FONST 5000 U series of products.
The E-Tree service is a multipoint-to-point, bidirectional convergence service.
E-Tree Service Scenario
A mobile carrier requires that services of each group users are aggregated and
transmitted to the 3G core network. Figure 2-5 shows the service scenario.
Version: A 2-13
Implementation of E-Tree Service Pattern
The FE services of the group users are accessed to nodes 1, 3, 5 and 9. The
FONST 5000 U series of products provide the E-Tree service to aggregate multiple
services between the group users and the RNCs to the 3G core network.
Figure 2-5 E-Tree Service Instance
2-14 Version: A
2.5.2 QoS Features
The following describes the QoS features of the FONST 5000 U series of products,
including the QoS overview, flow bandwidth control, service priority mapping, queue
buffer management, queue congestion scheduling, and ACL.
2.5.2.1 QoS Overview
The QoS refers to the performance when the data streams pass the network and is
used to provide end-to-end service quality assurance for users.
The QoS cannot improve the bandwidth. However, by properly allocating and
monitoring network resources, the QoS reduces the network delay and jitter to the
maximum extent, and ensures the quality of key services.
The indicators used for measuring the QoS are as follows:
u Service availability: the normal operating time of the services with quality
assured.
u Delay: the interval for sending and receiving of a data packet between two
reference points.
u Jitter: the variation in delay with which the packets from the same router reach
the Rx side.
u Throughput: the rate of sending data packets on the network and uses the
mean rate or peak rate.
u Packet loss rate: the highest rate of packet loss when the data packets are
transmitted on the network.
2.5.2.2 Flow Bandwidth Control
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the port-based flow bandwidth
control. By setting the PIR value, the user can limit the rate of input flow at a port on
the card panel.
For example, if the rate limit of a 10G port is set to 2G, the flow which is not larger
than 2G will pass through the port, whereas the flow which is greater than 2G will be
discarded.
Version: A 2-15
All tributary cards, except the 16TN1 and the 1TO3 cards, support the port-based
flow bandwidth control.
2.5.2.3 Service Priority Mapping
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the DiffServ and achieve the PHB
defined in the standard on the network, so that the network operators can assure
the QoS at different service quality levels for users.
When forwarding data, the FONST 5000 U series of products support the mapping
of the user priority and VLAN priority in the received packets to the PHB and the
mapping of the PHB in the sent packets to the VLAN priority.
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the PHB setting for the VPWS
channels and VPWS streams. An existing PHB and VLAN priority mapping table
can be used or a specific PHB service level can be appointed.
2.5.2.4 Queue Buffer Management
When network congestion occurs, the FONST 5000 U series of products use the
specific queue buffer management policies to ensure the QoS of high-priority
services.
The FONST 5000 U series of products support tail drop and WRED queue buffer
management policies.
u Trail drop
When the queue is filled to its maximum capacity, the newly arriving packets
are dropped until the queue has enough room to accept incoming traffic.
u WRED
Before the output buffer reaches the START threshold, no packet is dropped;
when the output buffer exceeds the END threshold, all packets are dropped;
when the output buffer is within two thresholds, the drop rate is a function of the
mean queue length.
2-16 Version: A
2.5.2.5 Queue Scheduling
When congestion occurs, the FONST 5000 U series of products use different queue
scheduling policies to ensure the QoS of high-level services.
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the following queue scheduling
modes:
u SP
Strict-priority queue scheduling: Packets in the queue are strictly scheduled

based on the priority. The packets in a queue with a lower priority can be sent
only after the queue with a higher priority is empty.
u WFQ
Weighted fair queue scheduling: The queues are scheduling fairly according to
the weight allocated to each queue. The queue with a higher priority is
allocated a larger weight and occupies higher bandwidth; the queue with a
lower priority is allocated a smaller weight and occupies lower bandwidth.
2.5.2.6 ACL
The ACL is used for stream recognition. A series of matching conditions are
configured to categorize packets, and therefore filtering the packets. The conditions
can be source addresses, destination addresses, and port numbers of the packets.
In the QoS policy, the ACL is only used to match packets. The actions (deny or permit)
in the ACL rules are ignored and not used as principles for discarding or forwarding
the packets.
2.5.3 OAM Features
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the access to the link OAM based on
the ITU-T Y.1731 Ethernet OAM and IEEE 802.3ah OAM to perform OAM on the
user side, perform quick fault detection to trigger protection switchover, and provide
carrier-level service QoS on the route switching network. Table 2-4 shows the OAM
standards supported by the FONST 5000 U series of products.
Version: A 2-17
Table 2-4 OAM Standards Supported by the FONST 5000 U Series of Products
Network Layer OAM Standard

Access link OAM IEEE 802.3ah
Ethernet OAM ITU-T Y.1731
2.5.3.1 OAM Overview
According to the network operation requirements, the network management is

classified into operation, administration, and maintenance, namely, OAM.
u Operation and administration: analyzing, predicting, planning, and configuring

network and services.
u Maintenance: testing the network and services, and performing fault

management.
The ITU-T defines the OAM function as follows:
u Monitoring performance and generating maintenance information, and

evaluating the network stability based on the information.
u Detecting the network fault by periodically querying and generating various

maintenance and alarm information.
u Ensuring normal network running by scheduling or switching to other entities to

bypass the failed entity.
u Transmitting the fault information to the management entity.
2.5.3.2 Access Link OAM
The access link OAM is an end-to-end OAM function specific to services and
supports the detection on Ethernet link quality across multiple NEs.
2.5.3.3 Ethernet OAM
The Ethernet OAM is a tool monitoring network problems and works on the data line
layer. The Ethernet OAM uses the OAM PDU periodically exchanged between
equipment sets to report the network status, so that the network manager can
effectively manage the network.
2-18 Version: A
The Ethernet OAM complies with the Y.1731 standard and supports the proactive
and on-demand fault management mechanisms, thereby achieving the Ethernet
continuity check, loopback detection, link tracing message, alarm indication alarm,
maintenance communication channel message, and remote defect indication.
2.6 Protection Capability
See Table 2-5 for the protection types supported by the FONST 5000 U series of
products.
Table 2-5 Protection Types Supported by the FONST 5000 U Series of Products
Protection Type Protection Name Description
1+1 protection for the NE See 1+1 Protection for the NE

management cards Management Card
M+N protection for the See M+N Protection for the Cross-
Equipment-level cross-connect cards connect Card
protection 1+1 protection for the power
See 1+1 Protection for the Power Card
cards
1+1 protection for the input See 1+1 Protection for the Input Power
power supply Supply
OCh 1+1 protection See OCh 1+1 Protection

OCh m:n protection See OCh m:n Protection
OCh Ring protection See OCh Ring Protection
ODUk 1+1 protection See ODUk 1+1 Protection

ODUk m:n protection See ODUk m:n Protection
ODUk Ring protection See ODUk Ring Protection
Network-level Optical channel 1+1 See Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength

protection wavelength protection Protection
Optical channel 1+1 route See Optical Channel 1+1 Route
protection Protection
1+1 optical multiplex section See 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section
protection Protection
Optical line 1:1 / 1+1
See Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1 Protection
protection
Ethernet LAG protection See Ethernet LAG Protection

See Network Management Information
Network management information protection
Protection
Version: A 2-19
2.7 Fault Isolation and Analysis
The following describes the fault isolation and analysis of the FONST 5000 U series
of products, including the integrated maintenance system, online EMS help, and
flexible OTN overhead configuration, which facilitates quick fault analysis and
isolation.
2.7.1 Integrated Maintenance
The IAMS is an intelligent maintenance system developed for the FONST 5000 U
series of products. The system is able to obtain alarm and performance data from
the OTNM2000, and implement the rapid and precise isolation of failure through a
certain algorithm, rule call and associative analysis. It can also make pre-warning
against the degradation trend of the system, so as to enhance the stability of
FONST 5000 U product network operations.
Based on the mechanism for generating FONST 5000 U product alarms and mutual
suppression between alarms, the system forms the alarm rule tree with source
alarm as the root and restrained alarms as nodes (or leaves). It can also flexibly add
or delete analysis rules to ensure the accuracy and effectiveness of alarm and
performance analysis.
2.7.2 Online EMS Help
The EMS provides an EMS help menu, with which users can make a quick search
of explanations, causes and troubleshooting procedures of each alarm and
performance code, and manage the alarms and performance events quickly and
accurately. In later versions, the help menu will provide associative analysis of each
alarm and performance event, management of common faults and case study to
make fault isolation and management simple and easy.
2.7.3 Flexible OTN Overhead Configuration
The FONST 5000 U series of products introduce abundant OTN overheads and are
equipped with a sound fault monitoring mechanism.
2-20 Version: A
Overview
Traditional WDM products can only depend on B1 and J0 bytes in SDH overheads
for segmented performance and fault monitoring. When a service channel is on
several WDM systems, it is difficult to isolate faults quickly and accurately. The
FONST 5000 U series of products introduce abundant OTN overheads and are
equipped with a sound fault monitoring mechanism.
u With the configuration of overheads of SM bytes (OTUk layer section

monitoring bytes), performance parameters and faults on electrical
regeneration sections can be monitored.
u With the configuration of overheads of PM bytes (ODUk layer channel

monitoring bytes), performance parameters and faults on end-to-end
wavelength channels can be monitored.
u The FONST 5000 U equipment provides six-level tandem connection

monitoring functions. Via reasonable planning and configuration of the TCMi (i
= 1 to 6) bytes at the ODUk layer, the FONST 5000 U equipment can realize
hierarchical and segmented management for multi-operator, multi-vendor,
multi-area and multi-subnetwork management systems.
Configuration and Application
u Examples of SM and PM overhead configurations
An engineering project involves three stations, that is, A, B, and C. Figure 2-6
shows the equipment type and service distribution of each station.
Figure 2-6 Network Diagram of the SM and PM Planning and Configuration Example
Version: A 2-21
Analyzing the service flow: Station B functions as the REG NE to implement the
feed-through between station A and station C. Therefore, the SM monitoring
connections between station A and station B and between station B and station
C are established for each wavelength service. See Figure 2-7 for the
configuration planning.
Figure 2-7 SM Configuration and Planning
In this example, 16 channels of services are added and dropped at stations A

and C. Therefore, PM connection for each wavelength service between
stations A and C needs to be set up. See Figure 2-8 for the configuration
planning.
Figure 2-8 PM Configuration and Planning
u Examples of TCMi overhead configurations
An engineering project involves six stations, which are A, B, C, D, E and F.

Figure 2-9 shows the equipment type, service distribution, location, and
equipment vendor of each station.
2-22 Version: A
Figure 2-9 Network Diagram of TCMi Configuration and Planning
Eight services from stations A to F pass the equipment from different operators
and vendors. With rational configuration of TCMi overheads, the hierarchical
and segmented fault management for eight channels of services can be
provided. Take the first channel of service as an example. The configuration
planning of its TCMi is shown in Figure 2-10. For the TCMi configuration
planning of other services, follow the instruction shown in this figure.
Figure 2-10 TCMi Configuration and Planning
Version: A 2-23
After the configuration shown in Figure 2-10 is completed, you can ascertain
whether faults occur in equipment of the same vendor (e.g., A, B or C, D or E, F)
according to the alarm and performance event indication of each TCM1, and
whether between equipment sets in the same area and of different vendors (e.
g., between stations B and C), or between equipment sets in different areas
and of different vendors (e.g., between stations D and E) according to the alarm
and performance event indication of each TCM2. In this way, the difficulties in
fault isolation when services cover multiple vendors / operators / areas can be
overcome.
2.7.4 Online Performance Monitoring
The FONST 5000 U series of products provide three types of online performance
monitoring modes, namely, EMS reading mode, built-in spectrum analysis unit mode,
and external analyzer mode.
Overview
The performance monitoring items under the aforesaid three modes based on
services and systems are shown in Table 2-6 and Table 2-7.
Table 2-6 Monitorable Performance Items of Services
Monitorable Performance
Service Service Remark
Item
STM-1/4/16/64/256 and
SDH/SONET B1 error
OC3/12/48/192/768
SM-BIP8 error Can be
OTU1, OTU2, OTU2e, OTU3
OTN TCMi-BIP8 error viewed via
and OTU4
PM-BIP8 error the network
FE, GE, 10GE, 40GE and management
Data
100GE system
Statistics of various packets directly
SAN (Storage ESCON, FICON, FC100/200/
received and transmitted
Area Network) 400/800/1200
Video service DVB and HDTV
2-24 Version: A
Table 2-7 Monitorable Performance Items of Systems
Type Performance Item Remark

Transmitting optical power Can be viewed via the network
Optical transport
and receiving optical power management system directly
layer and optical
Optical power, OSNR, and
multiplex section Obtained by using the built-in spectrum
wavelength value of each
layer analysis unit or the external meter
wavelength
Performance
Input / output optical power,
monitoring of
laser temperature, bias
optical channel
current, and cooling current
layer signals
SM-BIP8 error code, TCMi-

OTN electrical layer
BIP8 error code, PM-BIP8
signal detection
error code, and FEC count
Transmitted / received flow,
total number of transmitted / Obtained by checking the tributary
OTN electrical layer received packets, and interface card and the line interface card
signal detection numbers of error and lost on the EMS
transmitted / received
packets
Count of background errored

blocks, unavailable seconds
SDH electrical layer (UAS), errored second (ES),
signal detection severely errored second
(SES), and continuous
severely errored second
u EMS reading mode: The optical power of each key reference point of the
FONST 5000 U system, system performance, and service performance can be
directly read over the EMS. The query and statistics results are displayed in
tables and diagrams.
Version: A 2-25
u Built-in spectrum analysis unit mode: The built-in spectrum analysis unit
accesses the signals to be supervised of each key reference point of the
FONST 5000 U series of products. Meanwhile, the EMS monitors the spectrum
information of each signal in real time by using the built-in spectrum analysis
unit, including the input / output optical power per wavelength, optical signal-to-
noise ratio, and central wavelength value (or wavelength deviation), provides
graphical spectrum analysis function, and shows the service status of each
wavelength in real time.
u External spectrum analyzer mode: The product provides online monitoring

MON interface on the optical amplification card and the OSCAD card. Without
interrupting the services, the external spectrum analyzer obtains the
wavelength, optical signal-to-noise ratio, optical power, and channel flatness of
each optical channel.
2.8 Clock Features
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the physical-layer clock

synchronization mechanism, use the clock input/output interface to synchronize the
physical-layer clock, and support the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization protocol.
2.8.1 Physical-Layer Clock
The timing system of the FONST 5000 U series of products provides the SSM
processing function and can work in the locked, holdover and free running modes.
The timing source of the equipment can be an external synchronization timing
source, line timing source, and tributary timing source.
The tributary cards and line cards of the FONST 5000 U series of products both
support the clock extraction from the line.
2-26 Version: A
SSM Overview
The SSM is a key technology for the network to transmit the synchronous network
timing signal and is a necessary mean for ensuring a smooth timing link. In the
network, the network timing route can change at any time. The network unit is
required to use a higher intelligent system to determine whether the timing source is
applicable and whether to search for other appropriate timing sources to ensure that
low-level clocks only receive the timing from higher levels or the same level, and
avoid timing signal loop which may result in unstable synchronization.
Clock Working Mode
The clock has the following three working modes:
u Locked
This is the working mode in the normal state. In this mode, the equipment
automatically synchronizes with the selected clock source.
u Holdover
After the timing reference is invalid, the equipment enters the holdover mode,
uses the clock frequency stored before failure as the timing reference and
enables the oscillator to follow this stored value. This mode ensures a very
small frequency deviation between the clock frequency and the reference
frequency over a long period of time so as to keep the slip impairment within
the tolerance.
u Free running
When the clock reference is lost and the timing reference does not enter the
holdover mode, the internal oscillator of the equipment works in the free
running mode. This mode enables the internal oscillator to work with only a very
small deviation with the reference frequency over a long period of time and can
be used as the primary clock of the entire equipment. The corresponding clock
level standard is G.813.
Priority of the Synchronization Source
When the center control card works in the locked mode, it can select a
synchronization source according to the SSM value and priority to determine a
proper network synchronization signal.
Version: A 2-27
u When the QL enable is valid, the center control card processes the SSM
information and first selects the synchronization clock source according to the
sequence of the quality level (QL). When the QL values are the same, the clock
card then selects the synchronization clock source based on the priority.
u When the QL enable is disabled, the center control card does not process the
SSM information but selects the synchronization clock source only based on
the priority.
2.8.2 PTP Clock
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the IEEE 1588 V2 Ethernet clock
synchronization. The PTP clock complies with the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol. The
clocks of all nodes on the network are periodically synchronized by means of the
interaction of PTP protocol packets between clock nodes, so that the Ethernet-
based distributed system can reach the sub-microsecond level, and frequency
synchronization and time synchronization between network nodes are achieved.
In a distributed system, clocks and time are usually applied to the following
scenarios:
u Frequency-based application: It is mainly used in the scenario where multiple

control points of the distributed system need to be synchronized. Each control
point needs to adopt and execute control algorithm and control commands
simultaneously.
u Time stamp-based application: It is mainly used in the scenario where the

absolute time value needs to be measured. After time stamps are appended to
specific events, the sequence of the events can be determined.
The key technology to realize the preceding applications is time synchronization.

The purpose of time synchronization is to accurately and precisely transfer the
reference time to each control point.
A PTP clock system uses the master-slave hierarchy. The master clock sends the
PTP protocol messages to the slave clock, and the slave clock calculates its time
deviation from the master clock according to delay in receiving messages and other
relevant information. Afterwards, it adjusts itself to be synchronous with the master
clock.
2-28 Version: A
The highest-level clock GMC can exchange PTP protocol packets over each clock
node (ordinary clock, boundary clock and transparent clock) and transmit the clock
synchronization information to all clock nodes in the network.
PTP Clock Node
u Ordinary Clock (OC)
The OC clock node is an originating or a destination node in the network. Only

one PTP port of this clock node participates in time synchronization, and the
OC receives the synchronization time of the previous node via this port.
Besides, when the OC clock node works as the clock source, the
synchronization time can only be transmitted to the succeeding node via one
PTP port.
u Boundary Clock (BC)
The BC clock node has multiple PTP ports for time synchronization. One port
can receive the synchronization time from the previous node, and advertise the
synchronization clock to the succeeding node over the remaining ports. In
addition, when this clock node functions as a clock source, it can advertise the
synchronization time to the succeeding node over multiple PTP ports.
u Transparent Clock (TC)
The TC clock node has multiple PTP ports but it only forwards the PTP protocol
packets among the ports and performs forwarding delay rectification rather than
synchronizing the clock over any port. The TC includes the following two types:
4 E2ETC: directly forwards the non-P2P protocol packets in the network and
takes part in the calculation of the delay over the entire link.
4 P2PTC: directly forwards the Sync, Follow_Up, and Announce packets

only and terminates other PTP protocol packets, and takes part in the
calculation of delay on each segment of the link.
PTP Clock Port Status
Every port of the OC and BC maintains an independent PTP state machine that
defines the state allowed by ports and the conversion rules between states. A PTP
port may be at either of the following two states:
u MASTER: The port provides a clock source for the succeeding node.
Version: A 2-29
u SLAVE: The port is kept synchronized with the port in MASTER state on the
previous node.
PTP Master-slave Clock Hierarchy
The Master-Slave relationship between the clock nodes is relative. Every pair of
clock nodes that synchronize with each other has the following Master-Slave
relationship:
u The node which transmits the synchronization time is the master node, and the
node which receives the synchronization time is the slave node.
u The clock at the master node is the master clock, and the clock at the slave
node is the slave clock.
The optimum clock in the entire PTP system is GMC that has the best stability,
accuracy, and determinability. Each system has only one GMC and each subnet has
only one master clock. The slave clock is synchronous with the master clock. Each
system has only one GMC and each subnet has only one master clock. The slave
clock is synchronous with the master clock.
The optimum clock can be either specified manually in a static mode or be elected
by the clock algorithm BMC in a dynamic mode according to the clock precision,
level, and UTC on each node.
Figure 2-11 shows the process for establishing a master clock and a slave clock
between the OC and the BC in the PTP system.
Figure 2-11 PTP Master-slave Clock Hierarchy
2-30 Version: A
In Figure 2-11, OC1 is at the root of the hierarchy and is referred to as Grandmaster.
The Port 1 of BC1 is a SLAVE relative to the Grandmaster. All ports, except Port 1,
of BC1 are MASTERs relative to the clock equipment that is connected to the ports .
The Port 1 of BC2 is a SLAVE to the BC1. All ports except Port 1 of BC2 are
MASTERs relative to the clock equipment that is connected to these ports.
2.9 ASON Features
The product design fully considers the support of the ASON. By loading the control
plane, the ASON network based on the FONST 5000 U series of products can be
constructed, facilitating the smooth migration from the traditional wavelength
division network to the ASON network.
On setting up the ASON, FiberHome provides a full series of ASON products and
well-developed solutions. Please see ASON Solution for further information.
2.10 Intelligent Fan
The fan unit provides two working modes: intelligent and manual modes.
Overview
u Intelligent mode: The fan unit automatically adjusts the fan rotation speed
according to the change of the equipment temperature.
u Manual mode: The fan unit can work based on the rotational level set on the
EMS, including full speed, high speed, middle high speed, middle speed,
middle low speed, low speed, and ultra-low speed.
Warning:
The manual mode can be used to monitor the equipment temperature in

real time. Because the fan is fixed at a certain rotating speed choice, the
speed will not be not adjusted according to the feedback. In the normal
operations of the equipment, make sure that the fan unit is in the
intelligent mode.
Version: A 2-31
The fan unit adopts the soft-start mode to reduce the influence caused by the start
of the fan on the equipment. When the fan is in the intelligent mode, before the NE
management card controls the fan, the fan rotates at a medium rotational speed.
u After the NE management card controls the fan, the NE management card
periodically searches the temperature feedback information of each card,
compares the temperature feedback information with the preset fan rate control
parameters of each card, and determines the rotating speed choice information
of the fan.
u The fan unit controls the fan to rotate at the required rotating speed choice
according to the fan rotating speed choice information sent by the NE
management card, to ensure normal heat dissipation of the equipment.
u When the fan is faulty, the fan unit sends the fault information to the NE
management card and reports the alarm information about the fan fault to the
network management system.
2.11 PIC Features
The PIC cards of the FONST 5000 U series of products integrate ten 10 Gbit/s
electrical and optical transceiver functions and ten specific-wavelength optical
signal multiplexing and demultiplexing function and support the conversion from ten
10 Gbit/s electrical signals to one OTN multiplexing signal. Without the amplifier, the
transmission distance can also reach 40 km. The application scenarios of services
can be classified into 100 Gbit/s optical fiber system, 200 Gbit/s optical fiber system,
and 400 Gbit/s optical fiber system according to the optical fiber bandwidth.
2.11.1 System Model of the 100 Gbit/s Optical Fiber

Bandwidth
Figure 2-12 is the system model of the 100 Gbit/s optical fiber bandwidth in the PIC
system.
2-32 Version: A
Figure 2-12 100G Optical Fiber Bandwidth System Model

Bandwidth
system.
Version: A 2-33

Bandwidth
system.
2-34 Version: A
Version: A 2-35
2.12 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s

Transmission Solutions
The following describes the transmission solutions of the FONST 5000 U series of
products specific to different types and rates of services.
2.12.1 100 Gbit/s Transmission Technology
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the 48/96×100 Gbit/s transmission
solution. The FONST 5000 U series of products uses the advanced coherent
detection technology and does not require any dispersion compensation module for
CD and PMD compensation on a pure 100 Gbit/s coherent network. Figure 2-15
shows a typical application of the 100 Gbit/s transmission solution.
Figure 2-15 Typical Application of the 100 Gbit/s Transport Solution
The 100 Gbit/s coherent transmission solution of the FONST 5000 U series of
products provide unique technical benefits in terms of ultra-long-haul transmission,
network simplification, high-efficient bandwidth utilization, and smooth upgrade.
Ultra-long-haul Transmission
The ultra-long-haul transmission refers to the ultra-long distance transmission

without electrical regeneration (longer than 1000 km) and ultra-long single span
transmission (attenuation larger than 44 dB). The major factors limiting the ultra-long
distance and ultra-long span transmission include noise, dispersion, non-linear
effect, and PMD. The product uses the low-noise optical amplifying and PM-QPSK
technologies to achieve ultra-long-haul and ultra-long span transmission.
2-36 Version: A
u The large-gain and high-output power EDFA module can effectively increase
the transmit power per wavelength.
u The PM-QPSK new line code can decrease the limit on the 100 Gbit/s signal
transmission distance caused by the dispersion, PMD, and non-linear effect,
and achieve ultra-long-haul and ultra-long span transmission.
Network Simplification
The 100 Gbit/s coherent transmission solution adopted by the FONST 5000 U
series of products provides high PMD tolerance, which can simplify the network
structure and reduce network design and maintenance costs.
The PMD is an important factor limiting the 100 Gbit/s signal transmission distance.
Because the circular degree and internal stress of the optical fiber are not even, the
signal pulse spreading is distorted, resulting in the increase of error code rate with
continuous accumulation during the transmission.
Using the DP-QPSK coherent reception combined with the DSP technology
adopted by the FONST 5000 U series of products, the dispersion capacity can be
increased to ±55,000 ps/nm and the DGD tolerance can exceed 100 ps, which
completely eases the limits caused by the dispersion and PMD on the high-speed
transmission system.
High-Efficient Bandwidth Utilization
products supports the access of multiple services and rates. The ODUflex
technology ensures high-efficient utilization of the bandwidth and reduces the
transmission cost per bit.
u Multiple services and rates can be borne over the 100 Gbit/s transmission
channels.
u The ODUflex technology supports flexible bandwidth adjustment and

scheduling.
Version: A 2-37
Smooth Upgrade
products supports smooth upgrade from the traditional network to the coherent
network.
u The traditional network configured with DCM can be smoothly upgraded to the
100 Gbit/s coherent network without adjusting the DCM on the existing
network.
u The 100 Gbit/s coherent wavelength and the 10 Gbit/s or 40 Gbit/s wavelength
can be transmitted in a hybrid mode while satisfying the wavelength spacing
requirements.
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the 48 / 96 × 40 Gbit/s transmission

solution. Figure 2-16 shows a typical application of the 40 Gbit/s transmission
solution.
2-38 Version: A
The 40 Gbit/s transmission technology used by the FONST 5000 U series of

products has the following features:
u Two dispersion compensation modes:
4 Centralized dispersion compensation: The negative dispersion optical fiber

simultaneously compensates multiple channels, and a DCM is required.
4 Automatic dispersion compensation: The FEC count and line error code
rate on the receive end are collected to control the TDCM of each channel.
The dispersion compensation amount is automatically adjusted according
to the actual conditions of the optical fibers without extra DCM, thereby
greatly increasing the dispersion compensation precision and reducing the
maintenance work load and complexity.
u Coherent receiving and DSP technology: The dispersion tolerance capability is

increased to ±55000 ps/nm and the DGD tolerance exceeds 100 ps. In this way,
the optical fiber dispersion and PMD effect do not limit the high-speed, long-
haul transmission system.
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the 48 / 96 × 10 Gbit/s transmission

solution. Figure 2-17 shows a typical application of the 10 Gbit/s transmission
solution.
The 10 Gbit/s transmission technology adopted by the FONST 5000 U series of

products uses the centralized dispersion compensation. The negative dispersion
optical fiber simultaneously compensates multiple channels, and the DCM is
required.
Version: A 2-39
2.12.4 Multi-rate Hybrid Transmission
With increasing service requirements, the current 10 Gbit/s DWDM transport system
will be gradually upgraded to the 40 Gbit/s and the 100 Gbit/s transport system. The
40 Gbit/ s and 10 Gbit/s compatible hybrid transmission, coherent and incoherent
hybrid transmission are highly necessary. The FONST 5000 U series of products
support the 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s compatible hybrid transmission, coherent and
incoherent hybrid transmission, ensuring smooth system upgrade.
Incoherent Hybrid Transmission
The new and upgraded 40 Gbit/s wavelength can be accessed to the multiplexing
unit together with the 10 Gbit/s wavelength on the existing network and transmitted
over the same optical fiber, without affecting the existing and new services.
Figure 2-18 shows a typical application of the 40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s compatible
hybrid transmission.
Figure 2-18 Hybrid Transmission of 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s Signals in the Non-coherent
System
Coherent Hybrid Transmission
The coherent wavelength can be accessed to the multiplexing unit together with the
incoherent wavelength on the existing network and transmitted over the same
optical fiber, without affecting the existing and new services.
Figure 2-19 shows an application of the incoherent and coherent wavelength hybrid
transmission.
2-40 Version: A
Figure 2-19 Hybrid Transmission of 100 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 10 Gbit/s Signals in the
Coherent System
2.13 Card Self-Booting
The self-booting refers to that the computer activates all components to complete
the operating system upload. The operating system performs more complex tasks
that cannot be performed by the self-booting code.
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the self-booting function. The
FONST 5000 U series of products support the self-booting function. When the NE
management card is in place and works properly and another card is inserted into
the equipment, the system can automatically detect the network block and NE to
which the new card belongs as well as the card name, and reports the information to
the OTNM2000, prompting the user to confirm the information and store the
detected configuration information. This function simplifies the management and
configuration process and facilitates the engineering activation commissioning and
subsequent maintenance.
2.14 Remote Upgrade
Remote login is one of the original services provided by the Internet to facilitate
remote computer operation by a user. The remote login has been widely applied to
the transport network such as SDH, MSTP, OTN, and PTN, and in particular, in
terms of large-scale engineering activation, equipment upgrade, and network
monitoring and maintenance.
Version: A 2-41
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the upgrade for hardware FPGA of
each card and BMU software over a remote computer, which facilitates the
engineering activation and maintenance, and meets the future system upgrade
requirements.
2-42 Version: A
3 Product Structure
The following describes the structure of the FONST 5000 U series of products,
including hardware structure and software architecture.
Hardware Structure
Software Architecture
Version: A 3-1
3.1 Hardware Structure
The hardware of the FONST 5000 U series of products includes the cabinet, the
PDP, the DCM, the subracks, and the cards. The following describes the
appearance, dimensions, and functions of each hardware component.
3.1.1 Cabinet (680 mm Deep)
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of the cabinet (680 mm deep).
Figure 3-1 Appearance of the Cabinet (680 mm Deep)
3-2 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Table 3-1 shows the model of the cabinet (680 mm deep) used by the FONST 5000
U series of products.
Table 3-1 Specifications of Cabinet (680 mm Deep)
Cabinet Model Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm)
404000305 1600×600×680
404000306 2000×600×680
404000307 2200×600×680
404000308 2600×600×680
3.1.2 Cabinet (340 mm Deep)
Figure 3-2 shows the appearance of the cabinet (340 mm deep).
Version: A 3-3
Figure 3-2 Appearance of the Cabinet (340 mm Deep)
Table 3-2 shows the model of the cabinet (340 mm deep) used by the FONST 5000
U series of products.
Table 3-2 Specifications of Cabinet (340 mm Deep)
Cabinet Model Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm)
404000282 1600×600×340
404000283 2000×600×340
404000284 2200×600×340
404000285 2600×600×340
3-4 Version: A
3 Product Structure
3.1.3 PDP (3000064)
The following describes the appearance and functions of the PDP (3000064). The
PDP (3000064) model is 850A.
3.1.3.1 Function
The PDP (3000064) mainly performs the functions of power supply distribution,
alarm signal processing, lightning protection, and reverse polarity connection
protection. It inducts external power and distributes it among other electrified
equipment inside the cabinet. Meanwhile, the PDP receives the alarm signals from
other equipment inside the cabinet, and then displays and outputs the alarm signals.
The major functions of the PDP (3000064) are as follows:
u Power distribution: Inducts eight channels of -48V power (four active and four
standby) from the external (e.g., the power cabinet) and provides four sets of
redundant branch power rails (eight branch power rails total). The maximum
current of a branch power rail is 63A.
Note:
For details about the PDP (3000064) input and output current, refer to
PDP850A User Guide.
u Supports the reverse polarity connection protection function.
u Supports alarm signal processing: Receives alarm signals reported from the
corresponding equipment via the four alarm convergence connectors, provides
audio alarms for the signals, illuminates the cabinet-top indicator LEDs and
outputs alarm signals to the upper layer equipment (such as the head of row
cabinet).
u Supports the lightning protection module alarm report: When the lightning
protection module fails, the PDP outputs the lightning protection failure signals,
and reports them to the network management system via the equipment.
Version: A 3-5
u Supports the lightning protection: The PDP can effectively block the induced
lightning of 4 kV in the common mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us combination wave)
or of 2 kV in the differential mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us combination wave) on
the power cable.
3.1.3.2 Appearance
The PDP (3000064) is located on the top of the cabinet, and the appearance is as
shown in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3 Appearance of the PDP (3000064)
3.1.4 PDP (3000068)
PDP (3000068) model is 296B.
3-6 Version: A
3 Product Structure
3.1.4.1 Function
The PDP (3000068) mainly performs the functions of power supply distribution,
alarm signal processing, lightning protection, and reverse polarity connection
protection. It inducts external power and distributes it among other electrified
equipment inside the cabinet. Meanwhile, the PDP receives the alarm signals from
other equipment inside the cabinet, and then displays and outputs the alarm signals.
The major functions of the PDP are as follows:
u Power distribution: Inducts two channels of -48V power (one active and one
standby) from the external (e.g., the power cabinet) and provides three sets of
redundant branch power rails (six branch power rails total). The maximum
Note:
PDP296B User Guide.
u Supports the reverse polarity connection protection function.
corresponding equipment, provides audio alarms for the signals, illuminates the
cabinet-top indicator LEDs and outputs alarm signals to the upper layer
equipment (such as the head of row cabinet).
u Supports the lightning protection module alarm report function: When the
lightning protection module fails, the PDP outputs the lightning protection failure
signals, and reports them to the network management system via the
equipment.
u Performs the lightning protection function: The PDP can effectively block the
induced lightning of 4 kV in the common mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us
combination wave) or of 2 kV in the differential mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us
combination wave) on the power cable.
Version: A 3-7
3.1.4.2 Appearance
3.1.5 PDP (3000082)
PDP (3000082) model is 1063A.
3.1.5.1 Function
The PDP (3000082) mainly performs the functions of power supply distribution and
alarm signal processing. It inducts external power and distributes it among other
electrified equipment inside the cabinet. Meanwhile, the PDP receives the alarm
signals from other equipment inside the cabinet, and then displays and outputs the
alarm signals.
3-8 Version: A
3 Product Structure
The major functions of the PDP (3000082) are as follows:
u Power distribution: Inducts ten channels of -48V power (five active and five
standby) from the external (e.g., the power cabinet) and provides five sets of
redundant branch power rails (ten branch power rails total). The maximum
Note:
PDP1063A User Guide.
corresponding equipment via the five alarm convergence connectors, provides
audio alarms for the signals, illuminates the cabinet-top indicator LEDs and
outputs alarm signals to the upper layer equipment (such as the head of row
cabinet).
3.1.5.2 Appearance
Version: A 3-9
3.1.6 DCM
The DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module) can compensate the optical signal
dispersion accumulated during the transmission process in the fiber and compress
the optical pulse signal, so as to resume the optical signal. It is used together with
the optical amplification card to implement the long-haul optical regeneration
transmission.
The DCM is an external unit installed in the DCM slide rail. Each DCM slide rail can
house up to two DCMs, as shown in Figure 3-6.
3-10 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Figure 3-6 The DCM Slide Rail
The DCM slide rail is installed at the bottom of the cabinet.
3.1.7 Subrack
The subracks of the FONST 5000 U series of products include the FONST 5000
U60 / U60 2.0 / U40 / U30 / U20 / U10 subrack and the COTP subrack. The FONST
5000 U60 / U60 2.0 / U40 / U30 / U20 / U10 subracks provide the electrical-layer
cross-connect function and are used to accommodate various types of cards to
achieve signal exchange between cards over the subrack backplane. The COTP
subrack provides the optical layer cross-connect and WDM functions instead of
electrical layer cross-connect function.
3.1.7.1 FONST 5000 U60 Subrack
The following describes the appearance, slot distribution, and mapping relationship
between the slots and the cards of the FONST 5000 U60 subrack.
Version: A 3-11
Appearance
The FONST 5000 U60 subrack consists of the front part and the rear part of subrack
connected through the connection board. Figure 3-7 shows the appearance of the
FONST 5000 U60 subrack.
Note:
u Six fiber spools of the rear part of subrack are delivered with the
subrack as accessories. After the subrack is installed in the cabinet,
the six fiber spools should be installed on both sides of the rear part
of the subrack.
u Four handles are provided on both sides of the subrack as

accessories and are delivered with the subrack. The handles are
used to move and lift the subrack. After the subrack installation is
completed, the handles should be removed.
3-12 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Figure 3-7 Appearance of the FONST 5000 U60 Subrack
Components of the FONST 5000 U60 subrack are as follows:
Version: A 3-13
No. Name Main Function

The card area is the principal part of the subrack and can house
(1) Card area all kinds of cards to implement various functions of the
equipment.
The fiber passage area is located below the card area of the
subrack. Each slot of the subrack corresponds to a wiring hole
Fiber passage
(2) in the fiber passage area. Optical fibers are led to the fiber
area
passage area through the corresponding wiring holes to keep
the equipment tidy and neat.
Used for air cooling. Four fan units are configured for each
(3) Fan unit
subrack.
Located at the bottom of the subrack, made up of a metal tray
and a low-density anti-dust screen. The anti-dust unit is secured
(4) Anti-dust screen
in the self latching mode and can be flexibly installed and
unplugged according to the requirements.
Used to coil the redundant optical fibers and located at both

(5) Fiber spool
sides of the subrack.
Subrack Used as the force bearing points of the subrack for moving or
(6)
handles lifting the subrack.
Power cable
(7) Used to lay the power cables of the subrack.
trough
Connection Used to connect the front part of subrack component with the
(8)
board rear part of subrack component.
(9) Mounting ear Used to secure the subrack in the cabinet.
Slot Distribution
The FONST 5000 U60 subrack is a three-layer, double-sided subrack. Figure 3-8
shows the slot distribution.
3-14 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Figure 3-8 Slot Allocation of the FONST 5000 U60 Subrack
The types and quantity of cards supported by the slots in the subrack are as follows:
u Service card: 64
u Cross-connect card: 9
u Control card: 2
u Power card: 6
u Terminal board: 1
Mapping Relationships Between Cards and Slots
Table 3-3 shows the mapping relationship between the slots and cards of the
Version: A 3-15
Table 3-3 Mapping Relationship Between the Slots and Cards of the FONST 5000 U60
Subrack
Card Name Suitable Slot Remark

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1
4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2,
10TP2, 20TP2
1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3
1TN4, 2TN4 16 to 47
Optional
4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2 48 to 79
1LN4 (single-slot)
10IL2
OSC
BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP
16 to 30
32 to 46
1LN4 (double-slot), 2LN4 Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
48 to 62
64 to 78
05 to 08
UXU2 Compulsory
84 to 88
CCU 01 to 02 Compulsory
Compulsory
Slots 11 and 12 are respectively responsible for
the active and standby power supply of the upper
00 part of the subrack.
11 to 12 Slots 00 and 91 are respectively responsible for
PWR
80 to 81 the active and standby power supply of the
91 medium part of the subrack.
Slots 80 and 81 are respectively responsible for
the active and standby power supply of the lower
part of the subrack.
AIF 03 Optional
3.1.7.2 FONST 5000 U60 2.0 Subrack
between the slots and the cards of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack.
3-16 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Appearance
The FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack consists of the front part and the rear part of
subrack connected through the connection board. Figure 3-9 shows the appearance
of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack.
Note:
u Four fiber spools of the rear part of subrack are delivered with the
the four fiber spools should be installed on both sides of the rear part
of the subrack.

Version: A 3-17
Figure 3-9 Appearance of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 Subrack
Components of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack are as follows:

equipment.
Fiber passage
area
3-18 Version: A
3 Product Structure

Used for air cooling. Eight fan units are configured for each
(3) Fan unit
subrack.

(5) Fiber spool
(6)
Power cable
(7) Used to lay the power cables of the subrack.
trough
(8)
Slot Distribution
The FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack is a three-layer, double-sided subrack.

Figure 3-10 shows the slot distribution.
Figure 3-10 Slot Allocation of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 Subrack
Version: A 3-19
u Service card: 64
u Control card: 2
u Power card: 16
u Terminal board: 1
Mapping Relationships Between Cards and Slots
Table 3-4 shows the mapping relationships between slots and cards.
Table 3-4 Mapping Relationship Between the Slots and Cards of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0
Subrack

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1
4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2,
10TP2, 20TP2
1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3
1TN4, 2TN4 16 to 47
Optional
4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2 48 to 79
1LN4 (single-slot)
10IL2
OSC
BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP
16 to 30
32 to 46
48 to 62
64 to 78
05 to 08
UXU2 Compulsory
84 to 88
1 to 8
PWR Compulsory
9 to 16
AIF 03 Optional
3-20 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Appearance
The FONST 5000 U40 subrack consists of the front part and the rear part of subrack
connected through the connection board. Figure 3-11 shows the appearance of the
Note:
u Four fiber spools of the rear part of subrack are delivered with the
the four fiber spools should be installed on both sides of the rear part
of the subrack.

Version: A 3-21

Power supply The power supply card area is dedicated for the power supply
(1)
card area cards to supply power for the equipment.
equipment.
3-22 Version: A
3 Product Structure

Fiber passage
area
Used for air cooling. Four fan units are configured for each
(4) Fan unit
subrack.

(6) Fiber spool
(7)
(8)
Slot Distribution
The FONST 5000 U40 subrack is a double-layer, double-sided subrack and

provides 80 card slots. Figure 3-12 shows the slot distribution.
Version: A 3-23
u Service card: 52
u Control card: 2
u Power card: 16
u Terminal board: 2
Mapping Relationship Between Slots and Cards
3-24 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Table 3-5 Mapping Relationship Between the Slots and Cards of the FONST 5000 U40
Subrack

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1
4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2,
10TP2, 20TP2
1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3
1TN4, 2TN4
01 to 52 Optional
4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2
1LN4 (single-slot)
10IL2
OSC
BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP
1 to 5
7 to 11
13 to 25
27 to 31
33 to 37
39 to 51
UXU2 57 to 64 Compulsory
AIF 53 to 54 Optional
Dedicated slot of
PWR Compulsory
the power card
Appearance
Figure 3-13 shows the appearance of the FONST 5000 U30 subrack.
Version: A 3-25
3-26 Version: A
3 Product Structure

(1)
equipment.
Fiber passage
area
Used for air cooling. Three fan units are configured for each
(4) Fan unit
subrack.

(6) Fiber spool
(7)
Slot Distribution
The FONST 5000 U30 subrack is a three-layer, single-sided subrack and provides
56 card slots. Figure 3-14 shows the slot distribution.
Version: A 3-27
The types and quantity of cards supported by the slots in the FONST 5000 U30
subrack are as follows:
u Service card: 40
u Control card: 2
u Power card: 8
u Terminal board: 2
3-28 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Table 3-6 Mapping Relationship between the Slots and Cards of the FONST 5000 U30
Subrack

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1
4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2,
10TP2, 20TP2
1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3
1TN4, 2TN4
01 to 40 Optional
4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2
1LN4 (single-slot)
10IL2
OSC
BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP
01 to 15
17 to 19
21 to 23
25 to 39
Dedicated slot of
PWR Compulsory
the power card
Dedicated slot for

AIF1, AIF2 Optional
the terminal board
Appearance
Version: A 3-29

(1)
equipment.
Fiber passage
area
3-30 Version: A
3 Product Structure

Used for air cooling. Two fan units are configured for each
(4) Fan unit
subrack.

(6) Fiber spool
Slot Distribution
The FONST 5000 U20 subrack is a double-layer, single-sided subrack and provides
The types and quantity of cards supported by the slots in the FONST 5000 U20
subrack are as follows:
u Service card: 26
u Control card: 2
Version: A 3-31
u Power card: 8
u Terminal board: 2
Subrack

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1
4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2, 10TP2,
20TP2
1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3
1TN4, 2TN4
01 to 26 Optional
4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2
1LN4 (single-slot)
10IL2
OSC
BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP
01 to 05
1LN4 (double-slot), 2LN4 07 to 11 Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
13 to 25
Dedicated slot of
PWR Compulsory
the power card
Dedicated slot for

AIF1, AIF2 Optional
the terminal board
Appearance
3-32 Version: A
3 Product Structure

equipment.
Fiber passage
area
Used for air cooling. One fan unit is configured for each
(3) Fan unit
subrack.

(5) Fiber spool
Version: A 3-33
Slot Distribution
The FONST 5000 U10 subrack is a single-layer, single-sided subrack and provides
u Service card: 12
u Control card: 2
u Power card: 2
3-34 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Subrack

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1
4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 10TP2
1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3
1TN4
4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2 01 to 12 Optional
1LN4 (single-slot)
10IL2
OSC
BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP
01 to 05
1LN4 (double-slot) Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
07 to 11
Dedicated slot of
PWR Compulsory
the power card
3.1.7.7 COTP (3030036) Subrack
between the slot and the card of the COTP (3030036) subrack.
Appearance
Figure 3-19 shows the appearance of the COTP (3030036) subrack.
Version: A 3-35
Figure 3-19 Appearance of the COTP (3030036) Subrack
Components of the COTP (3030036) subrack are as follows:
Number Name Main Function

Used for air cooling of the equipment and is at the top part of
(1) Fan unit
the subrack’s card area.
(2) Fiber spool
equipment.
Fiber passage
area
The anti-dust screen is at the bottom of the subrack and uses

the metal slide rail and low-density anti-dust screen. The anti-
dust unit is secured in the self latching mode and can be flexibly
installed and unplugged according to the requirements.
3-36 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Slot Distribution
The COTP (3030036) subrack is a single-layer, single-sided subrack and provides

Figure 3-20 Slot Allocation of the COTP (3030036) Subrack
u Optical service card: 13
u NE management card: 2
u Power card: 2
Table 3-9 shows the mapping relationship between the slots and cards of the COTP
(3030036) subrack.
Version: A 3-37
Table 3-9 Mapping Relationship between the Slots and Cards of the COTP (3030036)
Subrack

MST2, OTU2E, OTU2F, OTU2S,
2OTU2S
OMU2/4/8, ODU2/4/8, WDM2
01 to 14 Optional.
PA, OA (with the saturated output
less than 21 dBm), OMSP, OCP,
ITL50, OSCAD, OPM4 and OPM8
OTU3E, OTU3S, OTU3S
(coherent)
OTU4E, OTU4S
OMU40 / 48_O
OMU40 / 48_E
VMU40 / 48_O
VMU40 / 48_E 01 to 13 Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
ODU40 / 48_O
ODU40 / 48_E
WSS8M, WSS8D
WSS8M, WSS8D, and OA (with
the saturated output 21 dBm and
above)
OTU3F, OTU4F, OTU3E Optional. Each card occupies three

01 to 12
(coherent) slots.
OLP 06, 07 Optional.
OSC, EOSC 02 Compulsory
Each NE requires at least one EMU

EMU 00, 01 card. The two slots back up each other.
Compulsory for the main subrack.
FCU 00 Compulsory for the extended subrack.

Select either the EFCU card or the FCU
card according to whether DCC
EFCU 00, 01 function is supported. The EFCU card
must be selected when the equipment
is equipped with the Control Plane unit.
PWR 15 Compulsory.
AIF 14 Optional.
3-38 Version: A
3 Product Structure
3.1.7.8 COTP (3030105) Subrack
between the slot and the card of the COTP (3030105) subrack.
Appearance
Figure 3-21 shows the appearance of the COTP (3030105) subrack.
(1) Fiber spool (2) Mounting ear (3) Fan unit
(4) Anti-dust screen (5) Fiber passage area (6) Card area
Figure 3-21 Appearance of the COTP (3030105) Subrack
Table 3-10 describes the components of the COTP (3030105) subrack.
Table 3-10 Descriptions of Components of the COTP (3030105) Subrack
Component
No. Function
Name
Used to coil the redundant optical fibers and located at both sides
(1) Fiber spool
of the subrack.
Version: A 3-39
Table 3-10 Descriptions of Components of the COTP (3030105) Subrack (Continued)
Component
No. Function
Name
Used for air cooling of the equipment and is at the top part of the
(3) Fan unit
subrack’s card area.
Located at the bottom of the subrack, made up of a metal tray and
Anti-dust
(4) a low-density anti-dust screen. It can be secured by self-locking
screen
and be unplugged from the subrack along the slide rails.
subrack. Each slot of the subrack corresponds to a wiring hole in
Fiber passage
(5) the fiber passage area. Optical fibers are led to the fiber passage
area
area through the corresponding wiring holes to keep the equipment
tidy and neat.
It is the principal part of a subrack for containing various cards to

(6) Card area
implement different functions of the equipment.
Slot Distribution
See COTP (3030036) Subrack for the slot distribution.
See COTP (3030036) Subrack for the mapping relationship between slots and
cards.
3.1.8 Equipment Layout
The following introduces the equipment layout of the FONST 5000 U series of
products.
3.1.8.1 FONST 5000 U60
When assembling subracks in a cabinet, comply with the following requirements

during layout planning.
u The empty parts in the figure below are reserved for air cooling, and should not
be occupied.
3-40 Version: A
3 Product Structure
u Ensure that the environment temperature is lower than 40℃ on a long term
basis, and should not exceed 45℃ in a short term.
u Install subracks from the top down.
Figure 3-22 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000 U60
3.1.8.2 FONST 5000 U60 2.0

be occupied.
Version: A 3-41
Figure 3-23 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0
3.1.8.3 FONST 5000 U40

be occupied.
3-42 Version: A
3 Product Structure
3.1.8.4 FONST 5000 U30

be occupied.
Version: A 3-43
3.1.8.5 FONST 5000 U20

be occupied.
3-44 Version: A
3 Product Structure
3.1.8.6 FONST 5000 U10

u The Empty parts in the figure below are reserved for air cooling, and should not
be occupied.
u In the 2600 B layout, up to two 20A COTP (3030105) subracks can be

configured. Make sure that the ambient temperature should not exceed 40℃.
u When the 2200 mm cabinet is installed with a U10 subrack and one or two
COTP (3030105) subracks, refer to the 2200 A layout. If only one U10 is
installed, select position 1. If only one U10 and one COTP subrack are installed,
select position 1 and position 2. Make sure that the ambient temperature should
not exceed 40℃.
Version: A 3-45
u When the 2200 mm cabinet is installed with two or three U10 subracks, refer to
the 2200 B layout. Make sure that the ambient temperature should not exceed
40℃. If only two U10 subracks are installed, select position 2 and position 3.
u When the 2200 mm cabinet is installed with one U10 subrack and one or two
COTP (3030036) subracks, refer to the 2200 C layout. If only one U10 is
installed, select position 1. If only one U10 and one COTP subrack are installed,
select position 1 and position 2. Only one alarm cable is equipped for the
cabinet.
3.1.8.7 COTP

be occupied.
u Install COTP subracks according to sequence number.
3-46 Version: A
3 Product Structure
u In the 2600 B layout, when the COTP subrack-2 is configured with 100G cards,
make sure the ambient temperature should not exceed 40℃; when the COTP
subrack-1 is configured with 100G cards, make sure the ambient temperature
should not exceed 35℃.
Figure 3-28 Equipment Layout of the COTP
3.1.9 Card Overview
The following describes the naming rules, appearance, classification, and

positioning in the system of the service cards for the FONST 5000 U series of
products.
3.1.9.1 Naming Rules of the Service Cards
The electrical layer service cards for the FONST 5000 U series of products are
classified into the tributary interface cards and the line interface cards. These cards
vary from each other in interface quantities, interface rates and functions.
Figure 3-29 shows the naming rules of the electrical layer service cards.
Version: A 3-47
Figure 3-29 Naming Rules of the Electrical Layer Cards
Figure 3-30 shows an example name of a tributary interface card.
Figure 3-30 Example of Tributary Interface Card Names
Figure 3-31 shows an example name of a line interface card.
Figure 3-31 Example of Line Interface Card Names
The 10IL2 card is a PIC function card. The naming rules are slightly different, as
3-48 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Figure 3-32 Example of the 10IL2 Card Name
3.1.9.2 Card Appearance
Components of the cards are basically the same. Figure 3-33 shows the major
components and dimensions of the cards using the 10TP2 card as an example
(unit: mm). See the dimensions of the service cards, optical layer cards and the
management and auxiliary cards in the following tables.
Version: A 3-49
(1) Card bar code (2) Optical module (3) Card panel (4) Latch
(5) Circuit board (6) Connector (7) Indicator LED (8) Optical interface
(9) Laser class (10) Card abbreviation

identifier
Figure 3-33 Card Appearance
See Table 3-11 for the card appearance and dimensions of the service cards.
3-50 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Table 3-11 Card Appearance and Dimensions of the Service Cards
Panel
Occu-
Card Appearance Corresponding Card Dimensions (H ×
pied Slot
W) (mm)
8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2,
20TN2, 10TP2, 20TP2
1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3
1TN4, 2TN4
4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2
1 407×30
1LN4 (single-slot)
10IL2
BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP
AIF1, AIF2 (U40)
OSC (U60/U60 2.
0/U40/U30/U20/U10)
1LN4 (double-slot), 2LN4 2 407×60
UXU2 (U40/U30/U20/U10) 1 352×30
Version: A 3-51
Table 3-11 Card Appearance and Dimensions of the Service Cards (Continued)
Panel
Occu-
pied Slot
W) (mm)
UXU2 (U60/U60 2.0) 1 352×55
MST2, OTU2E, OTU2F, OTU2S,

2OTU2S
OMU2/4/8, ODU2/4/8, WDM2
OPM4, OPM8
OSC (036/105), EOSC
ITL50, OSCAD 1 368×30
Note 1
OA , PA
OCP, OMSP, OLP (1:1), OLP (1
+1)
EMU, FCU, EFCU
AIF (036/105)
OTU3E, OTU3S, OTU3S

(coherent)
OTU4E, OTU4S
OMU40 / 48_O
OMU40 / 48_E
VMU40 / 48_O 2 368×60
VMU40 / 48_E
ODU40 / 48_O
ODU40 / 48_E
WSS8M, WSS8D
OANote 1
3-52 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Panel
Occu-
pied Slot
W) (mm)
OTU3F, OTU4F, OTU3E

3 368×90
(coherent)
CCU
1 307×27.5
AIF (U60/U60 2.0)
PWR (U60) 1 247×30
Version: A 3-53
Panel
Occu-
pied Slot
W) (mm)
PWR (U60 2.0) 1 112×30
PWR (U40/U30/U20/U10) 1 90×30
PWR (036) 1 190×30
PWR (105) 1 164×30
3-54 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Panel
Occu-
pied Slot
W) (mm)
AIF1, AIF2 (U30/U20) 1 90.5×30
Note 1: The OA card whose saturated output power is not higher than 21 dBm occupies one
slot. The OA card whose saturated output power is higher than 21dBm occupies two
slots.
3.1.9.3 Card Classification
Based on the functions, the cards are classified into electrical layer cards, optical
layer cards, PIC cards, and system connection and management cards. The
electrical layer cards and optical layer cards can also be further classified, as shown
in Table 3-12.
Table 3-12 Card Classification
Type Corresponding Card
8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2,
Tributary interface unit 10TP2, 20TP2
1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3
1TN4, 2TN4
Electrical Electrical cross-connect unit UXU2

layer cards 4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2
Line interface unit
1LN4, 2LN4
MST2, OTU2E, OTU2S, 2OTU2S,
OTU2F, OTU3E, OTU3E(coherent),
Optical transponder unit
TU3S, OTU3S (coherent), TU3F,
OTU4E, OTU4S, OTU4F
Optical OMU48_O, OMU48_E, OMU40_O,
OMU series
multiplexing OMU40_E, OMU2, OMU4, OMU8
Optical layer
/
cards VMU48_O, VMU48_E, VMU40_O,
demultiplex- VMU series
VMU40_E
ing unit
Version: A 3-55
Table 3-12 Card Classification (Continued)
Type Corresponding Card
ODU48_O, ODU48_E, ODU40_O,

ODU series
ODU40_E, ODU2, ODU4, ODU8
Others ITL50, OSCAD

Dynamic optical add / drop
WSS8M, WSS8D
multiplexing unit
Optical amplification unit OA, PA

Optical protection unit OLP, OCP, OMSP
Optical spectrum analysis unit OPM4, OPM8
Optical supervisory channel unit OSC, EOSC
PIC electrical layer card 10IL2
PIC cards
PIC optical layer card BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP
CCU, EMU, FCU, EFCU, AIF, AIF1,

System connection and management unit
AIF2, PWR
3.1.9.4 Positioning of Cards in the System
The following describes the positioning of common cards in the OTN and PIC
systems.
OTN System
Figure 3-34 shows the positioning of the common cards in the OTN system.
Figure 3-34 Positioning of Common Cards in the OTN System
3-56 Version: A
3 Product Structure
PIC System
Figure 3-35 shows the positioning of the common cards in the PIC system.
Figure 3-35 Positioning of Common Cards in the PIC System
3.1.10 Tributary Interface Unit
See Positioning of Cards in the System for the application and position in the
system of the line interface unit.
This card mainly performs O / E conversion on the signals from the client side and
sends the converted signals to the cross-connect card for cross-connecting.
Meanwhile, the process reverse to the aforesaid process is implemented.
Version: A 3-57
3.1.11 Electrical Cross-connect Unit
Positioning of Cards in the System shows the application and positioning of the
electrical cross-connect card in the system. The UXU2 card provides the following
functions:
u Supports the cross-connection of the ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and flex) signals

and the switching of the Ethernet data packets.
u Performs the signal cross-connection function between lines, between the line
and the tributary, and between tributaries.
u Supports the card protection function, automatic or manual switchover, and

configuration of a proper number of cross-connect cards according to service
capacity requirements.
3.1.12 Line Interface Unit
See Positioning of Cards in the System for the application and position in the
system of the line interface unit.
This card aggregates or converts multiple electrical signals from the cross-connect
card and outputs one or multiple OTU2, OTU2e, OTU3, OTU3e, and ODU4 optical
signal(s) with DWDM standard-compliant wavelength, and sends the optical signal(s)
to the optical multiplexing card or the optical add / drop and multiplexing card for
wavelength division multiplexing; meanwhile, the process reverse to the aforesaid
process is implemented.
3.1.13 PIC Unit
The PIC unit includes the PIC electrical layer cards and PIC optical layer cards. The
electrical layer cards include the 10IL2 cards, and the optical layer cards include the
BMD2, BMD2P, and BMD2PP cards. The PIC unit is applicable to stations with a
small amount of traffic. Positioning of Cards in the System shows the application
and positioning of the PIC unit in the system.
Table 3-13 describes the main functions of the PIC unit.
3-58 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Table 3-13 Main Functions of the PIC Unit
Card Type Card Name Function
u Supports encapsulation of electrical layer

service signals and multiplexing of ten signals
with specific wavelength.
u Supports the hybrid transmission of the OTU2 /
Electrical layer OTU2e services.
10IL2
cards u Supports processing of the OTU2 / OTU2e
overheads and the ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, and flex)
overheads.
u Supports the loopback of the ODUk signal and
10GE signal at each level.
BMD2 u Multiplexes two signals and implements the

BMD2P reverse process of the conversion.
u Achieves the multiplexing and demultiplexing of
the main optical channel (1550 nm) and optical
Optical layer
supervisory channel (1510 nm) signals.
cards
BMD2PP u Provides one built-in PA amplification module
through each BMD2P.
u Provides two built-in PA amplification modules
through each BMD2PP.
3.1.14 Optical Transponder Unit
See Positioning of Cards in the System for the application of the optical transponder
cards and their positions in the system.
These cards access one or multiple client-side signals. After performing O / E

conversion, they aggregate or convert the signals to output OTU2, OTU3 or OTU4
signals of DWDM standard compliant wavelengths. In this way, they help the
multiplexing and the add / drop multiplexing cards to perform wavelength division
multiplexing (TXOTU) on signals of different wavelengths. And they can perform the
reverse process (RXOTU). In the whole process, the signals are transmitted
transparently.
Version: A 3-59
3.1.15 Optical Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Unit
The main function of the optical multiplexing / demultiplexing card is to multiplex or

demultiplex optical signals of different wavelengths. Before discussing the specific
functions of the cards, we should know the multiplexing / demultiplexing architecture
of the system.
Figure 3-36shows the unidirectional multiplexing / demultiplexing architecture of a

96-channel system. At the local end, multiplexing cards for CE and CO bands
multiplex the corresponding even channels and odd channels (48 channels in total)
of signals with 100 GHz channel-spacing, and signals outputted by multiplexing
cards for CE and CO bands are multiplexed by the ITL50 card and outputted as 96
multiplexed signals with 50 GHz channel-spacing. These signals, after being
amplified by the OA card, are multiplexed and transmitted to the opposite end by the
OSCAD card.
At the opposite end, the OSCAD card demultiplexes the main channel optical
signals and local supervisory signals, and transmits the latter to the OSC card for
processing. The main channel signals, i.e. 96 multiplexed signals of two bands with
50 GHz channel-spacing, are transmitted to the PA card for amplifying. After that,
they are demultiplexed into a CO band signal and a CE band signal by the ITL50
card. The two signals are transmitted to demultiplexing cards of the corresponding
bands for demultiplexing.
Figure 3-36 Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Architecture of a 96-channel System
The following is intended to introduce functions of this type of cards.
3-60 Version: A
3 Product Structure
OMU Series, VMU Series, and ODU Series
See Table 3-14 for cards included in OMU series, VMU series, and ODU series and
their functions.
Table 3-14 Functions of OMU Series, VMU Series, ODU Series Cards
Operating Channel
Series Card Name Function
Band Spacing
OMU48_O Multiplexes 48 wavelength-specific CO band

optical signals into one multiple-
OMU48_E CE band
wavelength signal.
100GHz
OMU40_O Multiplexes 40 wavelength-specific CO band
optical signals into a multiple-
OMU40_E CE band
wavelength signal.
Multiplexes 2 single wavelength /

OMU series OMU2 wavelength group optical signals
into a multiple-wavelength signal.

OMU4 wavelength group optical signals C band -

OMU8 wavelength group optical signals
Multiplexes 48 wavelength-specific
VMU48_O optical signals into a multiple- CO band
wavelength signal.
Performs the channel power

VMU48_E CE band
adjustment function.
VMU series 100GHz
Multiplexes 40 wavelength-specific
VMU40_O optical signals into a multiple- CO band
wavelength signal.
Performs the channel power

VMU40_E CE band
adjustment function.
ODU48_O Demultiplexes a multiple- CO band

wavelength optical signal into 48
ODU48_E wavelength-specific optical CE band
signals.
ODU series 100GHz
ODU40_O Demultiplexes a multiple- CO band
wavelength optical signal into 40
ODU40_E wavelength-specific optical CE band
signals.
Version: A 3-61
Table 3-14 Functions of OMU Series, VMU Series, ODU Series Cards (Continued)
Operating Channel
Series Card Name Function
Band Spacing
Demultiplexes one multiple-

wavelength optical signal into two
ODU2
wavelength-specific optical
signals. (Only for optical splitting)

wavelength optical signal into four
ODU4 C band -

wavelength optical signal into eight
ODU8
The ITL50 Card
When the FONST 5000 U Series is configured as an 80-channel or 96-channel

system, the ITL50 card should be applied to the channel spacing conversion
between 100 GHz and 50GHz as shown in Figure 3-36.
In the transmission direction, the comb filter multiplexes two signals (with 100 GHz
channel-spacing) output by the CO-band and CE-band multiplexing cards into a CO +
CE-band signal with 50 GHz channel-spacing, and sends the signal to the
amplification card.
In the receiving direction, the comb filter demultiplexes a CO + CE-band signal with
50 GHz channel spacing into CO and CE signals and sends them respectively to the
demultiplexing cards of the corresponding band.
The OSCAD Card
The OSCAD card mainly multiplexes and demultiplexes the main channel optical
signal and optical channel supervisory signal, and provides line input / output signal
monitoring ports. It can monitor the spectrum performance of the line input / output
optical signal without interrupting services. The application and position in the
system is shown in Figure 3-36.
3-62 Version: A
3 Product Structure
3.1.16 Dynamic Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer Unit
The WSS8M and the WSS8D cards provide the dynamic optical add and drop
multiplexing function and can add and drop any single-wavelength or wavelength
group signals from the multiplexed optical signals according to the configuration on
the EMS, and send the signals to the line card or the demultiplexing card.
Meanwhile, the cards can multiplex any single-wavelength or wavelength group
signals from the line card or the multiplexing card and support optical power
adjustment for each channel over the EMS.
Table 3-15 describes the functions of the cards.
Table 3-15 Functions of the WSS8M / WSS8D Cards
Card Name Function

Provides dynamic reconfigurable adding and fixed dropping functions:
Multiplexes signals of any wavelength or wavelength groups from nine
WSS8M adding ports and outputs the multiplexed signal to the line; cooperates
with demultiplexer cards to drop locally line input signals; supports 50
GHz channel spacing.
Provides dynamic reconfigurable dropping and fixed adding functions:

Drops any single wavelength signal or wavelength group signal from the
line signal to any one of the nine dropping ports via the network
WSS8D
management system; cooperates with multiplexer cards to multiplex
signals from the local and other line directions and send the multiplexed
signal to the line; supports 50 GHz channel interval.
Note 1: See ROADM and Application of ROADM for specific application of each card listed in
the table.
3.1.17 Optical Amplification Unit
The optical amplification unit mainly amplifies the power of the line optical signals to
extend the transmission distance of the optical signals. The difference between the
OA and PA cards lies in the amplifier modules and application scenarios.
Figure 3-37 describes the applications of each card in the system.
Version: A 3-63
Figure 3-37 Application of the OA and PA Cards in the System
3.1.18 Optical Protection Unit
The optical protection unit mainly provides the network self-healing protection
function at the optical layer, as shown in Table 3-16.
Table 3-16 Functions of the Optical Protection Unit Cards
Card Name Function Protection Layer
Supports two optical channel 1+1

protection groups, and provides
optical channel wavelength and
OCP optical channel route protection Channel layer
based on the card position; the
protection mode is dual-feeding
and selectively-receiving.
Mainly applied to the optical lines

with high reliability requirement,
Multiplex section layer (between
provides 1+1 protection for the
the multiplexing card of the local
OMSP optical multiplex section layer, and
NE and the demultiplexing card of
uses the dual-feeding and
the opposite end NE)
selectively-receiving protection
mode.
The OLP (1+1) card provides the 1
+1 protection for the optical lines Line section (between the optical
OLP and implements the protection by amplification cards of two NEs)
using the protection switchover
protocol.
3-64 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Table 3-16 Functions of the Optical Protection Unit Cards (Continued)
Card Name Function Protection Layer
The OLP (1:1) card provides the

1:1 protection for the optical lines
and implements the protection by
using the protection switchover
protocol.
Note 1: For details, see Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection, Optical Channel 1+1
Route Protection, 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection, and Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1
Protection.
3.1.19 Optical Spectrum Analysis Unit
The optical spectrum analysis unit includes the OPM4 and OPM8 cards, which have
the basically same functions. The OPM4 and OPM8 cards can receive the signals to
be supervised and monitor the wavelength quantity, central wavelength, optical
power, and optical signal-to-noise ratio of each signal over the EMS in the online
mode. The two cards can also cooperate with the VMU series of cards to achieve
the automatic optical channel power equalization function.
The difference between the OPM4 and OPM8 cards lies in the number of the
channels to be supervised. The OPM4 card can analyze the spectrum of four optical
signals, while the OPM8 card can analyze the spectrum of eight optical signals; and
each signal may contain 96-channel signal in compliance with the ITU-T standard.
3.1.20 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Positioning of Cards in the System shows the positioning and application of the
OSC card.
u Provides overhead multiplexing and transmission in two directions. In the Tx

direction, the overhead information of the local MCC/SCC, E1, E2, F1, K1, K2
and APR are multiplexed, and converted to the 1510 nm optical signals (25.344
Mbit/s). The converted signals are finally sent to the OSCAD card or the OLP
card. In the Rx direction, the reverse process is implemented.
u Supports the input and output of external clocks that can be synchronized with
the system clock.
Version: A 3-65
u Provides a 1588 clock interface to facilitate the input and output of the user
1588 clock. This clock is used for time synchronization.
u Outputs the PTP clock signals to the corresponding Ethernet equipment or

receives the PTP clock signals from the Ethernet equipment, so that the OTN
equipment can transmit the 1588 clock signals of the Ethernet equipment.
u Supports receiving sensitivity sufficient for ultra-long-haul line transmission. In

addition, the failure of the line amplification card does not affect the
performance of the optical supervisory channel.
3.1.21 System Connection and Management Unit
The system connection and management units provide power supply, NE

management, clock processing and auxiliary interfaces for the equipment. Each
card and its functions are listed in Table 3-17.
3-66 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Table 3-17 Functions of the System Connection and Management Unit
Card Name Card Name Function

u Provides the clock input and output functions, supports the IEEE
1588v2 time synchronization, and supports SSM information in
64×32 directions (provides 64 service card slots, each of which
supports up to 32 channels).
u Supports the control plane software and performs various
functions required by the ASON control plane.
u Forwards the SCC signals, processes a maximum of 1280 SCC
signals, and supports fast route switching.
u Performs the configuration management, fault management,
performance management and security management of the NE,
CCU Center control card and saves the NE management information on behalf of the
management system.
u Provides the management extension interface, integrates the
management of the equipment inside the cabinet and on the
neighboring rack into a unified management platform, and
processes a maximum of 1280 MCC signals.
u Monitors ambient temperature, and performs dual power supply
supervision, intelligent fan control, and card-present hardware
detection in the subrack accommodating the card.
u Supports 1+1 active / standby protection.
u Supports the remote SN configuration of IP addresses.
u Performs the configuration management, fault management,

performance management and security management of the NE,
and saves the NE management information on behalf of the
management system.
u Processes ESC and OSC overheads to implement management
plane information interconnection between the subracks
accommodating the card and other NEs. The card can process
NE management
EMU overheads of up to 56 GCCs and two OSCs.
card
u Provides the management extension interface, integrates the
management of the equipment inside the cabinet and on the
neighboring rack into a unified management platform.
u Monitors ambient temperature, and performs dual power supply
supervision, intelligent fan control, and card-present hardware
u Supports 1+1 hot standby.
Version: A 3-67
Table 3-17 Functions of the System Connection and Management Unit (Continued)
Card Name Card Name Function

u Performs outbound communication extension functions in the
subrack accommodating the card.
NE management
FCU u Performs dual power supply supervision, ambient temperature
card Note 1
detection, intelligent fan control, and card-present hardware
u Processes the overheads of 56 GCCs from the line interface card

and the optical transponder card, and overheads from two DCCs
from the OSCs (hereinafter referred to as the DCCs).
u Provides the monitoring and software commissioning interface (f
interface), alarm interface, external monitoring interface, F
interface, and program download interface, and performs dual
power supply supervision, ambient temperature detection,
NE management intelligent fan control, and card-present hardware detection in the
EFCU Note 2
card subrack accommodating the card.
u Provides the management extension interface, and integrates the
management of equipment of the same NE in different subracks
into a unified management platform using network cables.
u Monitors the temperature and power supply voltage in the
equipment room and generates alarms on over high temperature
and over low current.
u Supports 1+1 hot standby protection.
Accesses the -48V power for the subrack, provides centralized power
PWR Power supply card
supply for other cards in the subrack, and supports hot backup.
Provides the alarm output interfaces (ALM, AOR and AOC interfaces).
Provides the management or auxiliary interfaces, such as COM, F,
AIF Terminal board
ETH and SIG.
Provides external clock input and output interfaces.
Note 1: When the extension subrack is a COTP subrack and does not process DCCs, choose FCU card as the
management card of the extension subrack.
Note 2: When the extension subrack is a COTP subrack and does not process DCCs, choose EFCU card as the
enhanced management card of the extension subrack.
3-68 Version: A
3 Product Structure
3.2 Software Architecture
The FONST 5000 U series of products uses the modular software architecture
which comprises the BMU software (card management), the EMU software (NE
management), and the OTNM2000 software (network management system). The
software is run on the function cards, NE management cards, and the network
management host to perform equipment configuration, management, and
monitoring.
3.2.1 Overview
The system software architecture is shown in Figure 3-38.
Figure 3-38 System Software Architecture
3.2.2 Communication Protocol and Interface
The communication protocols and interfaces between various software modules are
as follows:
Version: A 3-69
u The NE management card interconnects with the EMS over the F interface.
The F interface uses FiberHome private protocol. The OTNM2000
interconnects with the third-party upper-level management system over the
CORBA interface.
u The physical channel between NEs (that is, the NE management cards) is the
OSC or the ESC that uses the IP protocol.
u The NE management card and the BMU of each card are interconnected over
the LAN using the IP protocol
3.2.3 BMU Software
The BMU software is embedded in each card, directly controls each function circuit,
and supports the card management by the NE management card.
The BMU software collects and processes various instant alarms, performance, and
status information in real time.
u When the card is being powered on, the BMU software applies for the
configuration from the NE management card, and initializes the card based on
the configuration, so that the card enters the preconfigured state after being
powered on.
u During the running of the card, the BMU software receives various control
commands issued by the NE management card and performs the specified
operations; meanwhile, the BMU software receives various queries from the NE
management card.
3.2.4 EMU Software
The EMU software uses an embedded real-time multi-task operating system. Based
on manager/agent model, the EMU software performs management on all cards in
an NE via a unified Ethernet bus.
3-70 Version: A
3 Product Structure
Management / Agent Application Module
The manager / agent application module includes the manager (M) and the agent
(A). On the NE layer, the management unit (EMU) of an NE can be designated as
an agent (A) or a manager/agent (M/A), that is, an agent with the management
function.
u When designated as an M/A, the NE not only serves as the agent of itself but
also manages other NE objects. The management functions of an M/A NE
focus on maintenance of remote objects.
u When designated as an A, the NE collects and processes performance data,

alarm or fault data, and status data of its BMUs, and receives and responds to
related commands issued by the manager. Similarly, the NE management layer
(EML) provides the manager function to the NE layer (NEL).
Network Communication Protocol Stack Software
The network communication protocol stack software performs management

information exchanges between the EMS and the NE and between various NEs.
Real-time Operating System
The EMU software uses the built-in real-time operating system, manages the
resources in the NE management card, and supports the execution of the
application programs, thereby performing basic functions such as task scheduling,
storage management, peripheral product management, and inter-process
communication.
3.2.5 EMS Software
The OTNM2000 comprises the data collection module, the data processing module,
the graphical user interface (GUI) management module, and the database. The
software architecture of the OTNM2000 is shown in Figure 3-39.
Version: A 3-71
Figure 3-39 OTNM2000 Software Architecture
The relationships between the modules shown in the figure and the functions of
these modules are described as follows:
u The OTNM2000 collects alarm and performance data of the managed objects
via the data collection module. The data collected are then analyzed and
processed by the data processing module and saved in the database.
u The data processing module provides fault management, performance

management, configuration management and security management for the
GUI management module.
u The GUI management module consists of the configuration management

module (Devcfg) and management interface module (OTNM2000).
3-72 Version: A
3 Product Structure
4 The configuration management module (Devcfg) is the EMS configuration

program for the operating environment of the equipment and the system. It
is used in equipment configuration (including equipment types, NE types,
IP addresses, etc.), manager configuration (including manager IP
addresses and protocol types), database setting, data checking, and other
related configurations.
4 The management interface module (the OTNM2000) is the main operating

interface program of the OTNM2000. It is used mainly in configuration
management, alarm management, performance management, and
security management.
Version: A 3-73
4 Configuration and Application
The FONST 5000 U series of products use the modular design and are configured
as various equipment types by means of multiple card combinations, so as to satisfy
different application requirements. The FONST 5000 U series of products can be
configured as the OTM, FOADM, ROADM, OLA, and PIC equipment types. The
following describes the functions, related function units, common configuration
principles, compositions, and signal flow of each equipment type.
OTM
FOADM
ROADM
OLA
PIC
Version: A 4-1
4.1 OTM
The following describes the functions, related function units, common configuration
principles, compositions, and signal flow of the OTM equipment.
4.1.1 Function
The OTM equipment is applicable to the terminal station and implements the adding
and dropping of all 96 services in the C-band. The OTM equipment comprises the
Rx part and the Tx part logically. In the Tx direction, the OTM amplifies the
aggregated / converted signals on the client side, multiplexes these signals with the
signals over the supervisory channel, and then sends the multiplexed signals to the
line for transmission. Simultaneously, the reverse process is performed in the Rx
direction.
The OTM equipment is applicable to the end points requiring the adding and
dropping of traffic in large amount in point-to-point, chain, and ring-with-chain
networks. The FONST 5000 U series of products support 48-channel and 96-
channel OTM equipment.
4.1.2 Related Functional Unit
See Table 4-1 for OTM related functional units and their configuration guidelines.
Table 4-1 OTM Related Functional Units
Type Configuration Description
Tributary interface unit
Electrical cross-connect
Electrical layer Compulsory –
unit
Line interface unit
Optical multiplexing and
Compulsory –
Optical layer demultiplexing card
Optical amplification unit Compulsory –
4-2 Version: A
Table 4-1 OTM Related Functional Units (Continued)
This card is
configured for the
Optical protection unit Optional station with the
protection
requirement.
Optical spectrum analysis

Optional –
unit
If the ESC mode is
Optical supervisory channel used, the optical
Optional
unit supervisory channel
unit is not required.
System connection and management unit Compulsory –
4.1.3 Common Configuration Principles
The following describes common configuration principles of the OTM station,

including the subrack selection, card selection, and slot arrangement.
Subrack Configuration
The subrack quantity is determined based on the service type and quantity.
Card Configuration
Table 4-2 describes the configuration principles for the compulsory and optional
OTM cards.
Table 4-2 List of Compulsory and Optional OTM Cards
Compulsory and Optional Card Quantity Remark

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1,
32TN1
Elec- Tributary 4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2,
Depending on service type and Compul-
trical interface 12TN2, 20TN2, 10TP2,
quantity. sory
layer card 20TP2
1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3
1TN4, 2TN4
Version: A 4-3
Table 4-2 List of Compulsory and Optional OTM Cards (Continued)

Nine cards can be configured in
each U60 subrack to work in M:N
protection mode.
each U60 2.0 subrack to work in
M:N protection mode.
Eight cards can be configured in
Electrical each U40 subrack to work in M:N
cross- protection mode.
UXU2
connect Six cards can be configured in
card each U30 subrack to work in M:N
protection mode.
Four cards can be configured in
protection mode.
Two cards can be configured in
each U10 subrack to work in
active-standby protection mode.
Line
4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2 Depending on service type and
interface
1LN4, 2LN4 quantity.
card
One OMU (or VMU) series card
and one ODU series card are
OMU series, VMU configured.
series , and ODU series VMU series of cards are
Optical of cards configured when optical channel Optional
multiplex- power automatic equalization is
ing and required.
demulti- One ITL50 card is configured for
Opti- ITL50
plexing the 96-channel system.
cal
card
layer Generally, one OSCAD card is
compulsory. If the OLP card is
OSCAD configured in the corresponding Optional
line direction, the OSCAD card is
not required.
It is configured based on the line

Optical
attenuation. Generally, the
amplifica- OA and PA Optional
configuration is single OA, PA +
tion card
OA, or PA + DCM + OA.
4-4 Version: A

If the line protection is required,
OLP
one OLP card is configured.
The quantity depends on the

number of channels to be
Optical
OCP protected. Each card can
protection Optional
implement two protection
card
groups.
If the multiplex section protection

OMSP is required, one OMSP card is
configured.
This card is configured when the

OSC, EOSC processing on the optical Optional
supervisory channel is required.
This card is configured based on

Optical the number of signals to be
supervi- supervised. For four or less
sory card signals to be supervised, the
OPM4, OPM8 Optional
OPM4 card is configured; for
eight or less signals to be
supervised, the OPM8 card is
configured.

Compul-
CCU, EMU each subrack to work in active /
sory
standby protection mode.
Two EFCU cards can be

configured in each subrack to
work in active / standby
FCU, EFCU Optional
System protection mode.
connection and One FCU card can be configured
management card in each subrack.
One AIF card can be configured
for each U60 / U60 2.0 / COTP
subrack.
AIF cardNote 1 Optional
Two AIF cards can be configured
for each U40 / U30 / U20
subrack.
Version: A 4-5

Six cards can be configured in
active-standby protection.
Sixteen cards can be configured
in each U60 2.0 subrack to work
in active-standby protection.
in each U40 subrack to work in
Compul-
Power supply card PWR card Eight cards can be configured in
sory
each U10 / COTP subrack to
work in active-standby
protection.
Dispersion It is configured based on the line

compensation DCM module dispersion compensation Optional
module requirement.
Note 1: The AIF card is not configured in the FONST 5000 U10 subrack.
Card Slot Arrangement
Besides the mapping relationships between the cards and the slots in each subrack
described in Subrack, you need to comply with the following arrangement principles
for easy operation and maintenance:
u Cards installed in fixed slots
4 The slots accommodating the NE management card, the power supply

card, the cross-connect card, and the AIF card are fixed and are selected
based on the mapping relationships between the cards and the slots in
each subrack described in Subrack.
4 The DCM unit is externally configured.
u Line interface card
4-6 Version: A
This type of cards should be installed from small wavelength to large

wavelength (from left to right), and from the lower part to the upper part of the
subrack. When the services only involve some wavelengths, the service cards
should be installed from small to large in terms of wavelength successively with
no intermediate empty slots.
u Optical multiplexing and demultiplexing card
To make fiber coiling easier, the OMU, VMU, and ODU series of cards are
generally installed in the same subrack with the line interface cards, close to
the two sides of the subrack.
Generally, the ITL50 card and the OSCAD card are installed in the same
subrack with the amplification card.
u OA card and PA card
Generally, the optical amplification card in the Rx direction on the line side is
installed on the left and the optical amplification card in the Tx direction on the
line side is installed on the right.
To implement the APR, the amplification cards and the OSC cards must be
installed in the same subrack, and communication configurations must be
implemented for the amplification cards and the OSC cards.
4.1.4 Composition and Signal Flow
The following describes the composition and signal flow of the 48-channel and 96-
channel OTM systems.
48-Channel OTM System
Figure 4-1 shows the composition of the 48-channel OTM system.
Version: A 4-7
Figure 4-1 Composition and Signal Flow of the 48-Channel OTM System
The signal flow of the 48-channel OTM system can be divided into the Tx and the
Rx directions.
u The signal flow in the Tx direction is described as follows:
4 The tributary interface unit receives the client signal. The client signal is
forwarded by the cross-connect card to the corresponding line interface
unit and is aggregated / converted by the line interface card into the signals
with specific wavelengths, and the signals are finally sent to the OMU.
4 All wavelength-specific signals are multiplexed into the 1550 nm main

channel optical signal via the OMU. After being amplified by the OA, the
main channel signal is multiplexed by the OSCAD card with the 1510 nm
local optical supervisory signal from the OSC card. The multiplexed signal
is then sent to the line for transmission.
u The signal flow in the Rx direction is described as follows:
4 The OSCAD card receives the line signal and demultiplexes it into the
1510 nm local optical supervisory signal and the 1550 nm main channel
optical signals.
4-8 Version: A
4 The optical supervisory signal is sent to the OSC card for processing. The
main channel optical signal, after being amplified by the PA, is sent to the
ODU card and demultiplexed into multiple-wavelength optical signals.
4 The wavelength signals are demultiplexed by the line interface unit, sent to
the cross-connect card and the tributary interface card for processing, and
finally sent to the corresponding client side equipment.
96-Channel OTM System
Figure 4-2 shows the composition of the 96-channel OTM system.
The 96-channel OTM is basically the same as the 48-channel OTM in composition,
except that the 96-channel OTM needs the ITL50 card to implement the conversion
between 100 GHz signals and 50GHz signals.
Version: A 4-9
Figure 4-2 Composition and Signal Flow of the 96-Channel OTM System
The signal flow of the 96-channel OTM system can be divided into the Tx and the
Rx directions.
4-10 Version: A
4 The tributary interface unit receives the client signal. The client signal is
forwarded by the cross-connect card to the corresponding line interface
unit and is aggregated / converted by the line interface card into the signals
with specific wavelengths; and the signals are finally sent to the OMU-O
and OMU-E accordingly.
4 All the wavelength-specific signals in the CO band and the CE band are
multiplexed into two 1550 nm main channel signals with a channel spacing
of 100GHz through the OMU-O and the OMU-E respectively. The two
signals are then multiplexed into one main channel signal with a channel
spacing of 50 GHz via the ITL50 card and sent to the OA respectively.
After being amplified by the OA, the main channel signal is multiplexed by
the OSCAD card with the 1510 nm local optical supervisory signal from the
OSC card.
4 The OSCAD card receives the line signal and demultiplexes it into the
1510 nm local optical supervisory signal and the 1550 nm main channel
optical signals.
4 The optical supervisory signal is sent to the OSC card for processing. The
main channel optical signal, after being amplified by the PA, is sent to the
ITL50 card and demultiplexed into two main channel optical signals in the
CO-band and the CE-band respectively via the ITL50 card.
4 The two main channel optical signals are sent respectively to the ODU-O
and ODU-E, and demultiplexed into multiple wavelength optical signals.
4 The wavelength signals are demultiplexed by the line interface unit and are
sent to the cross-connect card. After being processed by the tributary
interface card, the signals are sent to the corresponding client side
equipment.
4.2 FOADM
principles, compositions, and signal flow of the FOADM equipment.
Version: A 4-11
4.2.1 Function
The FOADM provides the fixed adding / dropping and multiplexing function for all
single-wavelength signals in the C-band. Generally, the FOADM is applied to the
intermediate station in a chain or a ring network.
The components of the FOADM are basically the same as those of the OTM. The
only difference is that the FOADM implements bidirectional service adding /
dropping.
The following describes common configuration principles of the FOADM station,

including the subrack configuration, card configuration, and slot arrangement.
Principles for configuring the FOADM subracks are described as follows:
u The FONST 5000 U60 / U60 2.0 / U40 / U30 / U20 / U10 subrack is required for
the electrical cross-connect function. The COTP subrack is required for the
optical layer transmission function.
u The quantity of subracks depends on the service type and quantity. Normally
the service cards in west and east directions are installed in the same subrack.
Card Configuration
The components of the FOADM are basically the same as those of the OTM. The
card configuration principles are basically the same, see Common Configuration
Principles. As the FOADM has two line directions, you need to pay attention to the
following in card configuration:
u The configuration of service cards should be based on service types and

quantities in both line directions.
4-12 Version: A
u As the FOADM has two line directions, the number of line-related cards is a
double of that of the OTM (such as the optical multiplexing and demultiplexing
cards, and optical amplification cards). The optical protection cards and the
DCM are configured based on the line requirements.


Generally, the ITL50 cards and the OSCAD cards are installed in the same
subrack with the amplification cards.
Version: A 4-13
Figure 4-3 shows the composition of the FOADM and the signal flow direction.
Figure 4-3 Composition and Signal Flow of FOADM
The FOADM processes the optical signals in two transmit directions, that is, west
receiving and east transmitting, and east receiving and west transmitting. As the
signal flow is the same in both directions, the following only describes the signal flow
in the direction of west receiving and east transmitting.
u The signal from the west line is demultiplexed by the west OSCAD card into the
1510 nm optical supervisory signal and the 1550 nm main channel optical
signal.
u The optical supervisory signal is sent to the OSC card for processing. The main
channel optical signal, after being amplified by the PA, is sent to the west ODU
4-14 Version: A
card and demultiplexed by the ODU card into multiple optical signals in specific
wavelength.
4 The wavelength signals terminated locally (such as the signals in

Channels 3 to n in Figure 4-3) are forwarded to the client side equipment in
the west over the line card, the cross-connect card, and the tributary card.
4 Wavelength signals to pass through transparently (e.g., the signal in

Channel 1 in Figure 4-3) are connected to the east OMU via fiber jumpers
inside the station.
4 Due to long transmission distance or the power unequalized with that of

the local add wavelength signals, some through-connected wavelength
signals (such as the signal in Channel 2 in Figure 4-3) requires the
regeneration function of the line card for transmission.
u After being uplinked by the east client equipment to the east tributary card,
cross-connect card, and line card, the client signal from the local station to the
east are input to the east OMU and multiplexed with the through-connected
signals by the east OMU. Then, the output multiplexed signals are amplified by
the OA card and input to the OSCAD card together with the supervisory signal
from the OSC card. After these signals are multiplexed, the signals are finally
sent to the east line for transmission.
4.3 ROADM
principles, compositions, and signal flow of the ROADM equipment.
4.3.1 Function
The ROADM is applied to the intermediate stations in the chain or ring networks and
performs dynamic configurable add/drop multiplexing. The ROADM is
recommended for intermediate stations where multi-dimensional optical grooming,
flexible service wavelengths, dynamic allocation are required.
Version: A 4-15
Working in cooperation with the WSSM, WSSD, optical multiplexing and

demultiplexing cards, the ROADM performs dynamic all-wavelength adding /
dropping, provides multi-dimensional inter-ring expansion, and supports up to 9-
dimensional optical wavelength grooming.
See Table 4-3 for ROADM related functional units and their configuration guidelines.
Table 4-3 ROADM Related Functional Units

This card is configured for the
Electrical Electrical cross-connect
Compulsory ROADM station with the electric
layer unit
cross-connect requirement.
Line interface unit
Required when a wavelength
Optical multiplexing and
Compulsory group is added / dropped at a
demultiplexing card
port.
Dynamic optical add / drop

Compulsory –
multiplexing unit
Optical amplification unit Compulsory –

Optical protection unit Optional station with the protection
requirement.
Optical spectrum analysis

Optical layer Optional –
unit
For a 2-dimensional ROADM,
only one OSC unit is configured.
For a multi-dimensional
ROADM (dimension quantity
Optical supervisory greater than 2), one OSC unit is
Optional
channel unit configured for each direction. If
the ESC (Electrical Supervisory
Channel) is used, the optical
supervisory channel is not
required.
4-16 Version: A
The following describes common configuration principles of the ROADM station,

Principles for configuring the ROADM subracks are described as follows:
u The FONST 5000 U60 / U60 2.0 / U40 / U30 / U20 / U10 subrack is required for
the electrical cross-connect function. The COTP subrack is required for the
optical layer transmission function.
u Service cards in all directions can be arranged in the same subrack or separate
subracks. The number of subracks depends on the quantity of services to be
terminated in each direction.
u For the ROADM with dimension n (greater than 2), n OSC cards need to be
configured. Therefore, an n-dimensional ROADM requires at least n subracks.
Card Configuration
The components of the ROADM are basically the same as those of the OTM. The
card configuration principles are basically the same, see Common Configuration
Principles. The only difference is that the dynamic optical add / drop multiplexing
cards are configured for the ROADM. Table 4-4 lists the configuration principles.
The configuration guidelines for other cards are described as follows:
u The configuration of service cards should be based on service types and

quantities in all dimensions (line directions).
u When the ROADM has multiple dimensions, the number of line-related cards is
increased based on the OTM accordingly (such as the optical multiplexing and
demultiplexing cards, and the optical amplification cards). The optical protection
cards and the DCM are configured based on the line requirements.
u The OMU, VMU, and ODU series cards are configured only when wavelength
groups are added / dropped at a port of the ROADM.
u One OSC card is configured for a 2-dimension ROADM. n OSC cards is

configured for an n-dimension (greater than 2) ROADM.
Version: A 4-17
Table 4-4 Compulsory Cards for the ROADM
Compulsory
Quantity Remark
Card
In the WSSM card mode, one
WSSM card is configured for each
line direction.
Dynamic optical In the WSSD card mode, one
add / drop WSSM WSSD card is configured for each
Compulsory
multiplexing WSSD line direction.
card In the WSS group mode (WSSM
card + WSSD card), one WSSM
and one WSSD are configured in
each line direction.
The slot arrangement principles for each ROADM mode are basically the same.


4-18 Version: A
Generally, the ITL50 cards and the OSCAD cards are installed in the same
subrack with the amplification cards.
The following introduces basic concepts, the composition and the signal flow using
2-dimensional and 9-dimensional ROADM models.
4.3.4.1 Basic Concept
The ROADM scenarios include wavelength dependence, wavelength independence

(colorless), direction dependence and direction independence (directionless).
Table 4-5 introduces these concepts respectively.
Version: A 4-19
Table 4-5 Basic Concepts of the ROADM
Concept Explanation Application
The OMU48_E, VMU48_E, ODU48_E,

OMU48_O, VMU48_O and ODU48_O
ports are used for adding / dropping. Wavelength dependence:
Only fixed wavelength can be added or Adding / dropping port (fixed
dropped at each adding or dropping port. wavelength)
u Low insertion loss and
low cost.
u If a new wavelength is to
Wavelength be used instead of an
dependence existing one, the fiber
connection of the line
card and the adding /
dropping port of the
multiplexing and
demultiplexing card must
be adjusted at the station.
The WSS8M+WSS8D, WSS8M+ODU or

WSS8D +OMU/VMU is used for adding /
dropping. Any wavelength can be added or
dropped at any port of the ROADM unit.
Wavelength independence:
Adding / dropping port
(tunable wavelength)
u The ROADM can be
reconfigured via the
Wavelength
network management
independence
system.
(colorless)
u The line cards required
by new services should
have been installed in the
subrack. If not, install
them at the station.
4-20 Version: A
Table 4-5 Basic Concepts of the ROADM (Continued)
Concept Explanation Application
The wavelength carrying the local service

can be transmitted in the fixed direction.
The current path cannot be

adjusted flexibly.
When it is required to adjust
Direction
the current path, the fiber
dependence
connection of the network
must be adjusted at the
station.
The wavelength carrying the local service

can be transmitted in the any direction. The current path can be
adjusted flexibly.
If service adjustment is
required, or the protection
Direction
path is required in case of
independence
working path failure, the
(directionless)
optical cross-connect can be
configured manually to
perform flexible service cross-
connect.
4.3.4.2 2-Dimensional ROADM Application
The 2-dimensional ROADM network supports service transmission in two directions.

For a smooth upgrade to a network of four or more dimensions, the ports can be
reserved and the ODU+WSS8M, WSS8D+WSS8M or OMU/VMU+WSS8D can be
configured.
Note:
In the following diagrams the WSS8M+WSS8D can also be replaced with

WSS8M+ODU or OMU/VMU+WSS8D.
Version: A 4-21
Wavelength Relevance & Direction Relevance Scenario
Figure 4-4 2-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Relevance & Direction Relevance)
4-22 Version: A
Wavelength Relevance & Direction Irrelevance Scenario
Figure 4-5 2-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Relevance & Direction

Irrelevance)
Version: A 4-23
Wavelength Irrelevance & Direction Irrelevance Scenario
Figure 4-6 2-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Irrelevance & Direction

Irrelevance)
4.3.4.3 9-Dimensional ROADM Application
The 9-dimensional ROADM network supports service transmission in nine

directions. For a smooth upgrade to a network of four or more dimensions, the ports
can be reserved and the ODU+WSS8M, WSS8D+WSS8M or OMU/VMU+WSS8D
can be configured.
Note:
In the following diagrams the WSS8M+WSS8D can also be replaced with

WSS8M+ODU or OMU/VMU+WSS8D.
4-24 Version: A
Wavelength Relevance & Direction Irrelevance Scenario
The services of NE1 can be transmitted in paths of nine directions.
u If the current path needs adjustment (such as service adjustment, or service

taken over to the protection path in case of the working path failure), the optical
cross-connect can be configured manually to perform flexible service cross-
connect.
u In the ASON, the re-routing function supports selecting a path automatically

and creating optical cross-connect automatically, so that the service
transmission of NE1 can be assured. n the wavelength relevance scenario,
only the same wavelength can be used for re-routing.
In this scenario, take NE1 as an example, only a group of OMU+ODU is required for
local service cross-connect in nine directions.
Version: A 4-25
Figure 4-7 9-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Relevance & Direction

Irrelevance)
Wavelength Irrelevance & Direction Irrelevance Scenario
The services of NE1 can be transmitted in paths of nine directions.
u If the current path needs adjustment (such as service adjustment, or service

taken over to the protection path in case of the working path failure), the optical
cross-connect can be configured manually to perform flexible service cross-
connect.
u In the ASON, the re-routing function supports selecting a path automatically

and creating optical cross-connect automatically, so that the service
transmission of NE1 can be assured.
4-26 Version: A
u If the multiplexing and demultiplexing cards with tunable wavelengths are also
used, in the wavelength irrelevance scenario, the service wavelengths can be
flexible adjusted so as to avoid wavelength congestion during re-routing.
Figure 4-8 9-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Irrelevance & Direction

Irrelevance)
4.4 OLA
principles, compositions, and signal flow of the OLA equipment.
Version: A 4-27
4.4.1 Function
The OLA is used at the optical amplification station without add and drop services.
The OLA amplifies the optical signals transmitted in two directions.
The OLA has the following functional units:
u Optical amplification unit
u Optical supervisory channel unit
u System connection and management unit
The following describes common configuration principles of the OLA station,

Generally, the COTP subrack is configured at the OLA station.
Card Configuration
Table 4-6 describes the optional and compulsory card configuration for the OLA.
Table 4-6 List of Compulsory and Optional OLA Cards

Optical Depends on the line
amplification PA and OA attenuation in each Optional
card direction.
Optical Optical
layer multiplexing Two cards are
and OSCAD configured for each Compulsory
demultiplexing station.
card
4-28 Version: A
Table 4-6 List of Compulsory and Optional OLA Cards (Continued)

One OSC card is
OSC configured for each Compulsory
station.
This card is
configured based
on the number of
signals to be
Optical
supervised. For four
supervisory
or less signals to be
card
OPM4, OPM8 supervised, the Optional
OPM4 card is
configured; for eight
or less signals to be
supervised, the
OPM8 card is
configured.
Two cards can be

configured in each
EMU card subrack to work in Compulsory
active / standby
protection.
Two EFCU cards

can be configured
in each subrack to
System connection and
work in active /
management card
FCU, EFCU standby protection Optional
mode.
One FCU card can
be configured in
each subrack.
One card can be
AIF configured in each Optional
COTP subrack.
Version: A 4-29
Table 4-6 List of Compulsory and Optional OLA Cards (Continued)

Two cards can be
configured in each
Power supply card PWR card subrack to work in Compulsory
active / standby
protection.
It is configured
based on the
Dispersion compensation dispersion
DCM Optional
module compensation
requirement in each
direction.
u The slots accommodating the NE management card, the power supply card,
and the AIF card are fixed and are selected based on the mapping relationships
between the cards and the slots in each subrack described in Subrack.
u The DCM unit is externally configured.
u OA card and PA card: Generally, the optical amplification card in the Rx

direction on the line side is installed on the left and the optical amplification card
in the Tx direction on the line side is installed on the right. To implement the
APR, the amplification card and the OSC card must be installed in the same
subrack, and communication configurations must be implemented for the
amplification card and the OSC card.
Figure 4-9 shows the composition of the OLA and the signal flow direction.
4-30 Version: A
Figure 4-9 Composition and Signal Flow of OLA
The signal from the west line is demultiplexed by the OSCAD card into the 1510 nm
optical supervisory signal and the 1550 nm main channel optical signal. The optical
supervisory signal is sent to the OSC card for processing. The main channel signal,
after being amplified by the OA card through the DCM, is multiplexed by the east
OSCAD card, together with the processed optical supervisory signals and finally
sent to the east line for transmission.
The signal from the east line is demultiplexed by the OSCAD card into the 1510 nm
optical supervisory signal and the 1550 nm main channel optical signal. The optical
supervisory signal is sent to the OSC card for processing. The main channel signal,
after being amplified by the PA card primarily and then by the DCM via the OA card
secondarily, is multiplexed together with the processed optical supervisory signals
by the west OSCAD card and finally sent to the west line for transmission.
4.5 PIC
principles, compositions, and signal flow of the PIC equipment.
Version: A 4-31
4.5.1 Function
The PIC station can implement the conversion from multiple 10 Gbit/s electrical
signals to one OTN multiplexing signal. Without an amplifier, the transmission
distance can reach up to 40 km.
See Table 4-7 for PIC related functional units and their configuration guidelines.
Table 4-7 PIC Related Functional Units

Electrical Electrical cross-connect The PIC electrical layer unit
Compulsory
layer unit includes the 10IL2 card.
PIC electrical layer unit
The PIC optical multiplexing

and demultiplexing unit includes
the BMD card. The card is
PIC optical layer cards Optional
configured based on the service
quantity and optical power
amplification requirement.
Optical layer
Optical protection unit Optional station with the protection
requirement.
If the ESC mode is used, the

Optical supervisory
Optional optical supervisory channel unit
channel unit
is not required.
The following describes common configuration principles of the PIC station,

The subrack quantity is determined based on the service type and quantity.
4-32 Version: A
Card Configuration
Table 4-8 describes the configuration principles for the compulsory and optional
PIC cards.
Table 4-8 List of Compulsory and Optional PIC Cards

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1,
Tributary 32TN1
Depending on service type and
interface 4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2,
quantity.
card 12TN2, 20TN2, 10TP2,
20TP2
protection mode.
each U60 2.0 subrack to work in
M:N protection mode.
Elec-
Electrical each U40 subrack to work in M:N Compul-
trical
cross- protection mode. sory
layer UXU2
connect Six cards can be configured in
card each U30 subrack to work in M:N
protection mode.
Four cards can be configured in
protection mode.
active-standby protection mode.
PIC
Depending on service type and
electrical 10IL2
quantity.
layer unit
PIC
The card is selected based on
optical BMD2, BMD2P, Compul-
the amplification module
Opti- layer BMD2PP sory
required by the line.
cal cards
layer
Optical
If the line protection is required,
protection OLP Optional
one OLP card is configured.
card
Version: A 4-33
Table 4-8 List of Compulsory and Optional PIC Cards (Continued)

The quantity depends on the
number of channels to be
OCP protected. Each card can
implement two protection
groups.
If the multiplex section protection

OMSP is required, one OMSP card is
configured.
Optical This card is configured when the

supervi- OSC processing on the optical Optional
sory card supervisory channel is required.

Compul-
CCU, EMU each subrack to work in active /
sory
standby protection mode.
Two EFCU cards can be

configured in each subrack to
work in active / standby
FCU, EFCU Optional
System protection mode.
connection and One FCU card can be configured
management card in each subrack.
One AIF card can be configured
for each U60 / U60 2.0 / COTP
subrack.
AIF cardNote 1 Optional
Two AIF cards can be configured
for each U40 / U30 / U20
subrack.
4-34 Version: A
Table 4-8 List of Compulsory and Optional PIC Cards (Continued)

Six cards can be configured in
in each U60 2.0 subrack to work
in active-standby protection.
in each U40 subrack to work in
Compul-
Power supply card PWR card Eight cards can be configured in
sory
each U10 / COTP subrack to
work in active-standby
protection.
Dispersion It is configured based on the line

compensation DCM module dispersion compensation Optional
module requirement.
Note 1: The AIF card is not configured in the FONST 5000 U10 subrack.
When installing the cards, follow the mapping relationships between the cards and
the slots in each subrack described in Subrack for easy operation and maintenance.
Generally, the PIC system is applied in the stations in low traffic volume. Using an
OTM-type PIC station as an example, Figure 4-10 shows the composition of the PIC
system.
Version: A 4-35
Figure 4-10 Composition and Signal Flow of PIC System
The signal flow of the OTM-type PIC station comprises that in the Tx direction and
that in the Rx direction.
4 The client side signals connected to the tributary interface card are
forwarded by the cross-connect card to the corresponding 10IL2 card (PIC
electrical layer unit), aggregated or converted by the 10IL2 card to signals
with specific wavelength, and sent to the BMD2PP card (PIC optical layer
card).
4 All signals with specific wavelengths output by the10IL2 card are

multiplexed by the BMD2PP card as 1550 nm main channel optical signals.
The signals are amplified by the internal amplifier, multiplexed with the
1510 nm local optical supervisory signals from the OSC card, and sent to
the line for transmission.
4 The BMD2PP card receives the line signal and splits it into 1510 nm
optical supervisory signals and the 1550 nm main channel optical signals.
4-36 Version: A
4 The optical supervisory signals are sent to the OSC card for processing.
After being amplified by the internal amplifier, the main channel optical
signals are split by the BMD2PP card into multi-wavelength group optical
signals.
4 The optical signals of each wavelength group are demultiplexed by the

corresponding 10IL2 card and are sent to the cross-connect card. After
being forwarded by the cross-connect card to the corresponding tributary
interface unit, the signals are processed by the tributary interface unit and
sent to the client side equipment.
Version: A 4-37
5 Protection Implementation
The following describes the overview, protection parameters, function

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of various protection types of the
FONST 5000 U series of products.
Equipment-level Protection
Network-level protection
Network Management Information Protection
Version: A 5-1
5.1 Equipment-level Protection
The FONST 5000 U series of products provide the equipment-level protection,

including 1+1 protection for the NE management cards, M+N protection for the
cross-connect cards, 1+1 protection for the power supply cards, and 1+1 protection
for the input power supply.
5.1.1 1+1 Protection for the NE Management Card

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the 1+1 protection for the NE
management cards of the FONST 5000 U series of products.
Overview
The FONST 5000 series of products include the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack, the
FONST 5000 U60 subrack, the FONST 5000 U40 subrack, the FONST 5000 U30
subrack, the FONST 5000 U20 subrack, the FONST 5000 U10 subrack, and the
COTP subrack. Table 5-1 describes the 1+1 protection for the NE management
cards of the subracks.
Table 5-1 1+1 Protection for the NE Management Cards of the FONST 5000 U Series of
Products
Compulsory Slot
Suitable Slot for Protection
for NE
Subrack Name NE Management Implementation
Management
Card Mode
Card
FONST 5000 U60 subrack 01, 02 01 The NE
FONST 5000 U60 2.0 management cards
01, 02 01
subrack are configured in two
FONST 5000 U40 subrack 55, 56 55 slots to achieve 1+1

protection. When the
FONST 5000 U30 subrack 41, 42 41
active card is faulty,
FONST 5000 U20 subrack 27, 28 27
the standby card
FONST 5000 U10 subrack 13, 14 13 takes over services
COTP subrack 00, 01 00 of the active card.
Note 1: The NE management card is the core card of the equipment. It is recommended that
the network management cards should be configured in both slots.
5-2 Version: A
Protection Parameters
Table 5-2 describes the 1+1 protection for the NE management card.
Table 5-2 1+1 Protection Parameters of the NE Management Cards
Parameter Description
Switching type 1+1 protection of the NE management cards
Revert mode Non-revertive

Switching time (ms) ≤ 50
The power-on network management cards are in the activated state. The active
card performs NE management. The active and standby NE management cards
exchange status information over the inter-card monitoring line, thereby achieving
active-standby switchover.
u Protection switchover process of the active and standby NE management

cards
When the active card is not present, fails, or receives the active / standby
switchover command from the EMS, the standby card is notified over the
monitoring line between the active and standby monitoring cards. At this time,
the standby card takes over the services of original active card.
After the fault of the original active card is cleared, the original active card will
work in the standby state and will not recover the working state until the current
active card is faulty or is manually switched over.
u Data synchronization between the active and standby NE management cards
The configuration data on the standby card must be synchronized with that on
the active card in real time to enable the standby card to work properly after
switchover. The active and standby cards support the following synchronization
modes:
4 The NE management card configuration: The standby card periodically

sends the configuration check information to the active card. The active
card compares the check information. If the check information is
inconsistent between the active and standby cards, the active card will
send the configuration information to the standby card for synchronization.
Version: A 5-3
4 Service data configuration (including overhead, protection, NE merge, and

wavelength configuration) on the EMS:
¡ During incremental configuration of service data configuration on the

EMS, the active card proactively sends the incremental configuration
to the standby card.
¡ The active and standby cards periodically send the check information
of service data configuration to each other.
After receiving the check information, the standby card compares the
information. The standby card will send the request of synchronizing
full service data configuration to the active card as soon as any
inconsistency is detected. After receiving the request, the active card
will send the full configuration to the standby card.
Note:
Full configuration of service data configuration refers to the collection of

all incremental configuration.
Switching Trigger Conditions
The following trigger conditions are supported:
u Automatic switching: When the standby card receives a message that the
active card is not present or fails, the switching will be implemented
automatically without manual operations.
u Manual switching: When the NE management card needs to be tested whether

it can be switched over normally, you can perform the switchover by manually
plugging the card, or issuing a command over the EMS.
5.1.2 M+N Protection for the Cross-connect Card

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the M+N protection of the cross-
connect cards for the FONST 5000 U series of products.
5-4 Version: A
Overview
The subracks of the FONST 5000 U series of products which can accommodate the
cross-connect cards include the FONST 5000 U60 subrack, FONST 5000 U60 2.0
subrack, the FONST 5000 U40 subrack, the FONST 5000 U30 subrack, the FONST
5000 U20 subrack, and the FONST 5000 U10 subrack. Table 5-3 describes the M
+N protection of the cross-connect cards in each subrack.
Table 5-3 M+N Protection for the Cross-connect Cards of the FONST 5000 U Series of
Products
Suitable Slot for Cross- Protection Implementation

Subrack Name
connect Card Mode
05, 06, 07, 08, 84, 85, 86, The slots for the cross-
FONST 5000 U60 subrack
87, 88 connect cards are in a parallel
05, 06, 07, 08, 84, 85, 86, relationship rather than
FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack active-standby relationship.
87, 88
The EMS and hardware can
FONST 5000 U40 subrack 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64
be used to control the
FONST 5000 U30 subrack 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48
activation state of the cross-
FONST 5000 U20 subrack 29, 30, 31, 32 connect cards. The activated
cross-connect cards work in
FONST 5000 U10 subrack 15, 16
load balancing mode.
Table 5-4 describes the M+N protection parameters of the cross-connect cards of
the FONST 5000 U series of products
Table 5-4 M+N Protection Parameters of the Cross-connect Cards of the FONST 5000 U
Series of Products
Switching type M+NNote 1 protection for the UXU2 card
Revert mode Non-revertive
Version: A 5-5
Table 5-4 M+N Protection Parameters of the Cross-connect Cards of the FONST 5000 U
Series of Products (Continued)

Note 1: M indicates the minimum number of the used cross-connect cards, and N indicates the
number of the protection cross-connect cards and is determined based on the traffic
carried by the equipment.
u When the cross-connect capacity per slot is smaller than or equal to 100 G, the M
values of the U60, U60 2.0, U40, U30, U20, and U10 subracks are 4, 4, 4, 3, 2,
and 1 respectively.
u When the cross-connect capacity per slot is smaller than or equal to 200 G, the M
values of the U60, U60 2.0, U40, U30, U20, and U10 subracks are 7, 7, 7, 5, 4,
and 2 respectively.
In the M+N protection for the cross-connect cards, the cross-connect cards are not
in the active-standby mode. The activated cross-connect cards take charge of the
service circuits between the tributary cards and line cards together. Each cross-
connect card exchanges the state information over the inter-card monitoring line as
follows:
u When a cross-connect card is not present, fails, or receives the inactive

command from the EMS, the remaining cross-connect cards take over the
cross-connect service of the original cross-connect card.
u After the original cross-connect card recovers, it is switched to the activated

state manually and resumes the working status. The remaining cross-connect
cards take charge of the cross-connect service together with the original cross-
connect card.
The trigger conditions for the protection switchover of the cross-connect cards are
as follows:
u Automatic switching: When the standby card receives a message indicating

that the active card is not present or fails, the switching occurs automatically
without manual operations.
5-6 Version: A
u Manual switching: When the cross-connect card needs to be tested whether it

can be switched over normally, you can perform the switchover by manually
plugging the card, using the hardware button, or issuing a command over the
EMS.
5.1.3 1+1 Protection for the Power Card
The following describes the 1+1 protection for the power cards of the FONST 5000
U series of products and the switchover trigger conditions.
Overview
The FONST 5000 series of products include the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack, the
FONST 5000 U60 subrack, the FONST 5000 U40 subrack, the FONST 5000 U30
subrack, the FONST 5000 U20 subrack, the FONST 5000 U10 subrack, and the
COTP subrack. The 1+1 protection of the power cards in each subrack is as follows:
u The FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack can accommodate 16 power cards, as
shown in Figure 5-1. The power cards in the same color work in the active /
standby mode.
Figure 5-1 Active and Standby Protection of the Power Cards in the FONST 5000 U60 2.0
Subrack
Version: A 5-7
u The FONST 5000 U60 subrack can accommodate six power cards, as shown
in Figure 5-2. The power cards in the same color work in the active / standby
mode, and they power the area having the same color with them.
Figure 5-2 Active and Standby Protection of the Power Cards in the FONST 5000 U60
Subrack
u The FONST 5000 U40 subrack can accommodate 16 power cards, as shown in
Figure 5-3. The power cards in the same color work in the active / standby
mode, and they power the area having the same color with them.
Subrack
5-8 Version: A
u The FONST 5000 U30 subrack can accommodate eight power cards, as
standby mode, and they power the area having the same color with them.
Subrack
u The FONST 5000 U20 subrack can accommodate eight power cards, as
standby mode, and they power the area having the same color with them.
Version: A 5-9
Subrack
u The two power cards in the FONST 5000 U10 subrack work in the active /
standby mode, as shown in Figure 5-6.
Subrack
u The two power cards of the COTP subrack work in the active / standby mode,
as shown in Figure 5-7.
5-10 Version: A
Figure 5-7 Active and Standby Protection of the Power Cards in the COTP Subrack
The active and standby power cards work in hot standby mode. No extra trigger
condition is required.
5.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Input Power Supply
The subrack and the cabinet both support the active / standby power supply input,
and the normal power supply of the equipment will not be influenced if any power
supply fails. The PDP used by the FONST 5000 U series of products includes
3000064, 3000068 and 3000082 models.
PDP (3000064)
The active and standby input power supplies of the cabinet are from four active and
four standby input terminals of the PDP (3000064) module, as shown in Figure 5-8.
Version: A 5-11
(1) External power supply -48 V input terminal (2) External power supply -48 V input terminal
(A) (B)
Figure 5-8 PDP (3000064) Power Input Protection
PDP (3000068)
The active and standby input power supplies of the cabinet are from three active
and three standby input terminals of the PDP (3000068) module, as shown in
Figure 5-9.
(A) (B)
5-12 Version: A
PDP (3000082)
The active and standby input power supplies of the cabinet are from five active and
five standby input terminals of the PDP (3000082) module, as shown in Figure 5-10.
(A) (B)
5.2 Network-level protection
The FONST 5000 U series of products provide network-level protection, including

the OTN electrical-layer protection, OTN optical-layer protection, and PTN
protection.
OTN Electrical-layer Protection
The FONST 5000 U series of products provide six types of electrical-layer OTN
network-level protection. The protection switchover of each type is implemented
among the electrical-layer tributary interface unit, the central control unit, and the
line interface unit.
To focus on the electrical protection, all protection diagrams in this section indicate
the unidirectional signal flow in the direction of local transmitting and the opposite
station receiving only, and the OMU, ODU, OA, and supervisory signal flow direction
corresponding to the optical channel are omitted. See Figure 5-11 for information
about the omitted part.
Version: A 5-13
Figure 5-11 Composition and Signal Flow of OTM
OTN Optical-Layer Protection
The OTN optical-layer protection includes optical channel 1+1 wavelength / route
protection, 1+1 optical multiplex section protection, and optical line 1:1 / 1+1
protection. The OTN optical-layer protection provides protection functions on the
optical layer using extra cards and lines by adding optical protection cards with the
splitting function, thereby avoiding service interruption caused by optical fiber line
deterioration or interruption.
PTN Protection
The PTN protection includes the Ethernet LAG protection in a way that binds a
group of physical Ethernet interfaces with the same rate into a logical interface to
increase bandwidth and protect links. The FONST 5000 U series of products can
achieve intra-card LAG protection. When any port is faulty, service packets are
distributed to other ports for transmission.
5-14 Version: A
5.2.1 OCh 1+1 Protection

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the OCh 1+1 protection of the
Overview
The OCh 1+1 protection is based on the 1+1 protection of a single optical channel
and achieves dual-feeding and selective-receiving of the optical channel signals
controlled by the CCU card. The switchover duration is shorter than 50 ms.
Table 5-5 describes the parameters for the OCh 1+1 protection.
Table 5-5 Parameters for the OCh 1+1 Protection
Protection Type OCh 1+1 protection
The WRT indicates the time that the services need to wait for
Wait to Restore Time
switching back to the original work channel after a fault of the work
(WRT)
channel is rectified.
It can be set to Revertive or Non-revertive.
u Revertive: After the work channel is faulty and services are
switched over to the protection channel, the services are
automatically switched back to the work channel if the work
Return mode
channel resumes.
u Non-revertive: After the work channel is faulty and services are
switched over to the protection channel, the services still work
on the protection channel if the work channel resumes.
The monitoring type includes SNCP/I, SNCP/N, SNCP/S, OCH and

Not Configured.
Alarm monitoring type
The switchover triggering alarms corresponding to the protection
vary with the monitoring types.
Version: A 5-15
Table 5-5 Parameters for the OCh 1+1 Protection (Continued)
The hold-off time indicates the delay duration for the protection
switchover.
u If the original line recovers (the original alarm is cleared) within
Hold-off time
the hold-off time, switchover is not performed.
u If the alarm persists, after the hold-off time is reached, the
switchover is performed based on the alarm.
It can be set to unidirectional protection or bidirectional protection.

u Unidirectional protection: When the working channel is faulty,
the receive end of the local NE is switched over to the interface
card of the protection line, and the opposite end NE does not
perform any action.
Mode
u Bidirectional protection: When the working channel is faulty, the
receive and the transmit ends of the local NE are switched over
to the protection line interface card, and the transmit and the
receive ends of the opposite NE are also switched over to the
protection line interface card.
Figure 5-12 describes the OCh 1+1 protection.
u In normal conditions, the cross-connect card cross-connects the signal from the
main line card to the corresponding tributary card.
u The signals of the working and protection channels are dual-fed. If the main
channel is faulty and the standby channel works properly, the main line
interface card feeds back the SF/SD information to the CCU card according to
the monitoring type and trigger conditions configured on the EMS. After the
CCU card receives the information, the cross-connect card cross-connects the
signals from the standby line card to the corresponding tributary card, namely,
achieves dual-fed and selectively-feeding.
u When the working channel restores, the service signals can be restored to the
working channel or not according to the revert type configured on the EMS.
5-16 Version: A
Figure 5-12 OCh 1+1 Protection
The OCh 1+1 protection includes four monitoring types: SNCP/I, SNCP/N, SNCP/S,
and OCH. They differ from each other in switching trigger conditions.
u SNCP/I (Inherent monitoring): In addition to the generally used alarms such as

the card failure alarm and LOS alarm, the trigger conditions also include the SM
section overhead alarms.
u SNCP/S (Sub-layer monitoring): In addition to the generally used alarms such

as the card failure alarm and LOS alarm, the trigger conditions also include the
SM and TCM section overhead alarms.
u SNCP/N (Non-intrusive monitoring): In addition to the generally used alarms

such as the card failure alarm and LOS alarm, the trigger conditions also
include the SM, TCM and PM section overhead alarms.
u OCH: In addition to the generally used alarms such as the card failure alarm
and LOS alarm, the trigger conditions also include the SM and PM section
overhead alarms.
5.2.2 OCh m:n Protection

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the OCh m:n protection of the
Version: A 5-17
Overview
The OCh m:n protection is based on the m:n protection of the optical channel,
where m indicates the number of protection channels and n indicates the number of
working channels.
This protection is implemented by the CCU card using the APS protocol and is a
dual-end switchover. The transmit end and receive ends perform protection
switchover simultaneously. The switchover of each channel is independent from that
of another channel, and the switchover duration is shorter than 50 ms.
Table 5-6 describes the parameters for the OCh m:n protection.
Table 5-6 Parameters for the OCh m:n Protection
Protection Type OCh m:n protection
(WRT)
Return mode
channel resumes.

Not Configured.
5-18 Version: A
Table 5-6 Parameters for the OCh m:n Protection (Continued)
switchover.
Hold-off time

the receive / transmit end of the local NE is switched over to the
protection line interface card, and the transmit / receive end of
the opposite NE is switched over to the protection line interface
Mode card.
u Bidirectional protection: When the working channel is faulty, the
receive and the transmit ends of the local NE are switched over
to the protection line interface card, and the transmit and the
receive ends of the opposite NE are also switched over to the
protection line interface card.
Here the OCh 1:2 protection is used as an example to describe the protection
principles.
The normal conditions are shown in Figure 5-13. At the local end, multiple signals
from the tributary cards are cross-connected by the cross-connect cards to the
working line cards 1 and 2. The signals, after being multiplexed by line cards, are
sent to the corresponding optical channel.
At the far end, the working line cards 1 and 2 demultiplex the corresponding optical
channel signals and send them to the cross-connect cards. After being cross-
connected by the cross-connect cards, the signals are sent to the corresponding
tributary cards.
Under this condition, no services are transported via the protection line cards and
the protection optical channels. In other words, the working channel is single-
feeding and single-receiving.
Version: A 5-19
Figure 5-13 OCh 1:2 Protection (Normal)
Figure 5-14 shows the fault conditions. For example, upon detecting the trigger
condition, the opposite end working line card 2 feeds back the SF/SD information to
the CCU card according to the monitoring type configured for the protection.
The opposite end equipment sends back the APS information to the local end. The
local CCU card controls the line card to perform bridging according to the APS
protocol. The cross-connect card cross-connects the ODUk signal to be protected of
the working line card 2 to the protection line card.
The opposite end CCU card controls the line card to perform the switchover
according to the APS protocol. The cross-connect card cross-connects the ODUk
signal from the protection line card to the corresponding tributary card, and services
over the working optical channel 2 are transmitted over the protection optical
channel. That is, switchover is required on both the local and far ends when a fault
occurs.
After the fault is rectified and the original working optical channel 2 works stably for
several minutes (flexibly configured on the EMS), the service signal is recovered to
the original working optical channel 2.
5-20 Version: A
Figure 5-14 OCh 1:2 Protection (Switching)
The OCh m:n protection includes four monitoring types: SNCP/I, SNCP/N, SNCP/S,
and OCH. They differ from each other in switching trigger conditions.



u OCH: In addition to the generally used alarms such as the card failure alarm
and LOS alarm, the trigger conditions also include the SM and PM section
overhead alarms.
Version: A 5-21
5.2.3 OCh Ring Protection

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the OCh Ring protection of the
Overview
The OCh Ring protection is the ring network protection based on the optical channel.
This protection type is applicable to the distributed service network. Only two
wavelength channels are required within the ring to protect the distributed services
between nodes.
When no extra services exist in the protection channels, all nodes are available, and
the length of the fiber is less than 1200 km, the protection switching can be
implemented within 50 ms once a switching event is detected.
Table 5-7 describes the parameters for the OCh Ring protection.
Table 5-7 Parameters for the OCh Ring Protection
Protection Type OCh Ring protection
(WRT)
Return mode
channel resumes.
5-22 Version: A
Table 5-7 Parameters for the OCh Ring Protection (Continued)

Not Configured.
switchover.
Hold-off time
As shown in Figure 5-15, the ring network is composed of six nodes. From outside
to inside, the four rings are respectively defined as ring 1 to ring 4. The wavelength
corresponding to ring 1 and ring 2 is λ1, and the wavelength corresponding to ring 3
and ring 4 is λ2. The solid lines in the figure indicate the Tx and Rx of the working
channel, and the dotted lines indicate the Tx and Rx of the protection channel.
The protection requires four line interface cards at each station, where two line
interface cards are used as east working and protection line interface cards and two
line interface cards are used as west working and protection line interface cards.
East line interface card 1 processes the signals transmitted over the east working
channel and received by the protection channel, as shown in the amplified diagram
of node 1 in Figure 5-15.
Assume that one service exists between nodes 1 and 3, and between nodes 5 and
6 respectively. Under normal conditions, the service route between nodes 1 and 3 is
the working channel of nodes 1↔2↔3, and the service route between nodes 5 and
6 is the working channel of nodes 5↔6.
Version: A 5-23
Figure 5-15 OCh Ring Protection
When a fault occurs in the working channel of nodes 1↔2 in Figure 5-15, the
service between nodes 5 and 6 will not be influenced, but the service between
nodes 1 and 3 will be influenced.
When nodes 1 and 2 detect that the switchover condition is met, they send the APS
information to node 3. Meanwhile, node 1 and node 3 check whether the protection
channel between nodes 1↔2↔3 is normal. If the channel is normal, nodes 1, 2, and
3 perform bridging and switchover. At this time, the service route between node 1
and node 3 is changed to the protection channel between nodes 1↔2↔3. The
protection route is in the same direction as the original service route and is a near
end switchover route, as shown in Figure 5-16.
5-24 Version: A
Figure 5-16 Near End Switching in OCh Ring Protection
If both the working channel and protection channel between nodes 1↔2 are faulty,
services between nodes 5 and 6 are not affected while services between nodes 1
and 3 are affected. At this time, the service route between nodes 1 and 3 is changed
to the remote protection route. The protection channel between nodes
1↔6↔5↔4↔3 is adopted. See Figure 5-17.
Version: A 5-25
Figure 5-17 Far End Switching in OCh Ring Protection
SF (signal failure) conditions: line optical signal loss (LOS) and SF conditions of the
OTUk layer and ODUk layer, such as alarms OTU_LOF, ODU_AIS, ODU_OCI,
ODU_LCK, PM_AIS, and TCMi_AIS.
SD (signal deterioration) condition: error degradation based on OTUk section

monitoring such as PM_BIP8_SD, TCMi_BIP8_SD, and FEC_D_SD alarms.
5.2.4 ODUk 1+1 Protection

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the ODUk 1+1 protection of the
5-26 Version: A
Overview
For the ODUk 1+1 protection, the dual-feeding and selective-receiving is

implemented via the electrical layer cross-connect within a switching time less than
50 ms.
The principles for the ODUk 1+1 protection are similar to those for the OCh 1+1
Protection. The difference is that the OCh 1+1 Protection is based on a single
optical channel, while the ODUk 1+1 protection is based on the ODUk timeslot in
the optical channel. The protected granularity of the ODUk 1+1 protection is smaller
than that of the former.
Table 5-8 describes the parameters for the ODUk 1+1 protection.
Table 5-8 Parameters for the ODUk 1+1 Protection
Protection Type ODUk 1+1 protection
(WRT)
Return mode
channel resumes.
u Non-revertive: After the work channel is faulty and services
are switched over to the protection channel, the services still
work on the protection channel if the work channel resumes.
The monitoring type includes SNCP/I, SNCP/N, SNCP/S, and Not

Configured.
vary with the monitoring types. For details about the triggering
alarms corresponding to the monitoring types, see
Troubleshooting Guide.
Version: A 5-27
Table 5-8 Parameters for the ODUk 1+1 Protection (Continued)
switchover.
u If the original line recovers (the original alarm is cleared)
Hold-off time
within the hold-off time, switchover is not performed.

the receive end of the local NE is switched over to the
interface card of the protection line, and the opposite end NE
does not perform any action.
Mode
u Bidirectional protection: When the working channel is faulty,
the receive and the transmit ends of the local NE are switched
over to the protection line interface card, and the transmit and
the receive ends of the opposite NE are also switched over to
the protection line interface card.
On the local end, one signal to be protected from the local tributary card is dual-fed
by the cross-connect card and is cross-connected to the active and standby line
cards by the cross-connect card. The line card multiplexes the signal to be
protected and other signals and forwards the signals to the corresponding optical
channel, as shown in Figure 5-18.
The signal to be protected is demultiplexed from the optical channel signals

corresponding to the active and standby line cards at the opposite end and is sent to
the cross-connect card.
u In normal conditions, the cross-connect card cross-connects the to-be-

protected signal from the main line card to the corresponding tributary card.
u If the working ODUk channel is faulty, the main line card feeds back the SF /
SD information to the CCU card according to the monitoring type, and the
cross-connect card cross-connects the signal from the standby line card to the
corresponding tributary card.
5-28 Version: A
u When the working ODUk channel restores, the service signals can be restored
to the working ODUk channel or not according to the revert type configured on
the EMS.
Figure 5-18 ODUk 1+1 Protection
The ODUk 1+1 protection includes three monitoring types: SNCP/I, SNCP/N, and
SNCP/S. The three modes differ from each other in switching trigger conditions.



5.2.5 ODUk m:n Protection

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the ODUk m:n protection of the
Version: A 5-29
Overview
The ODUk m:n protection is achieved by using the electrical layer cross-connect
and APS protocol. The protection switchover is shorter than 50 ms. m indicates the
number of protection ODUks and n indicates the number of working ODUks.
The principles for the ODUk m:n protection are similar to those for the OCh m:n
Protection. The difference is that the OCh m:n Protection is based on a single
optical channel, while the ODUk m:n protection is based on the ODUk timeslot in the
optical channel. The protected granularity of the ODUk m:n protection is smaller
Table 5-9 describes the parameters for the ODUk m:n protection.
Table 5-9 Parameters for the ODUk m:n Protection
Protection Type ODUk m:n protection
(WRT)
Return mode
channel resumes.

Configured.
5-30 Version: A
Table 5-9 Parameters for the ODUk m:n Protection (Continued)
switchover.
Hold-off time

the receive / transmit end of the local NE is switched over to
the protection line interface card, and the transmit / receive
end of the opposite NE is switched over to the protection line
Mode interface card.
u Bidirectional protection: When the working channel is faulty,
the receive and the transmit ends of the local NE are switched
over to the protection line interface card, and the transmit and
the receive ends of the opposite NE are also switched over to
the protection line interface card.
Here the ODUk 1:2 protection is used as an example to describe the protection
principles.
Assume that two ODUk signals to be protected are transmitted to the far end via the
working line card 1 and card 2 respectively. In practical application, the two ODUk
signals to be protected can also be transmitted to the far end via the same working
line card.
Under normal conditions, at the local end, the to-be-protected signals from the
tributary card are cross-connected via the cross-connect card and sent to the
working line card 1 and card 2. After being multiplexed with other signals by the
working line cards, the signals are forwarded to the corresponding optical channel,
as shown in Figure 5-19.
Version: A 5-31
At the far end, the working line cards 1 and 2 demultiplex the corresponding optical
channel signals into the signals which are to be protected, and send them to the
cross-connect cards. After being cross-connected by the cross-connect cards, the
signals are sent to the corresponding tributary cards. This process is single-feeding
and single-receiving of the working channel.
Figure 5-19 ODUk 1:2 Protection (Normal)
Figure 5-20 shows the fault conditions. For example, upon detection of the trigger
condition, the opposite end working line card 2 feeds back the SF/SD information to
the CCU card according to the monitoring type configured for the protection.
u The opposite end equipment sends back the APS information to the local end.
The local CCU card controls the line card to perform bridging according to the
APS protocol. The cross-connect card cross-connects the to-be-protected
signal of the working line card 2 to the specified channel of the protection line
card.
u The opposite end CCU card controls the line card to perform switchover
according to the APS protocol, and the cross-connect card cross-connects the
signal from the protection line card to the corresponding tributary card.
u The ODUk signals to be protected on the working optical channel 2 are

transmitted over the protection optical channel. In other words, switchover is
required on both the local and far ends when a fault occurs.
5-32 Version: A
u When the working ODUk channel restores, the service signals can be restored
to the working ODUk channel or not according to the revert type configured on
the EMS.
Figure 5-20 ODUk 1:2 Protection (Switching)
The ODUk m:n protection includes three monitoring types: SNCP/I, SNCP/N, and
SNCP/S. The three modes differ from each other in switching trigger conditions.



Version: A 5-33
5.2.6 ODUk Ring Protection

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the ODUk Ring protection of the
Overview
The ODUk Ring protection is the ring network protection based on the ODUk optical
channel. This protection is more applicable to networks with distributed services.
When no extra services exist in the protection channel, all nodes are available, and
the length of fiber is less than 1200 km, the protection switching can be
implemented within 50 ms once a switching event is detected.
The principles for the ODUk Ring protection are similar to those for the OCh Ring
Protection. The differences is that OCh Ring Protection is based on a single optical
channel, while the ODUk Ring protection is based on the ODUk timeslot in the
optical channel. The protected granularity of the ODUk Ring protection is smaller
Table 5-10 describes the parameters for the ODUk Ring protection.
Table 5-10 Parameters for the ODUk Ring Protection
Protection Type ODUk Ring protection
(WRT)
Return mode
channel resumes.
5-34 Version: A
Table 5-10 Parameters for the ODUk Ring Protection (Continued)

Configured.
switchover.
Hold-off time
An ODUk Ring consists of nodes 1 to 6; in this figure, the solid lines are the working
channels, and the dotted lines are protection channels.
The protection requires four line interface cards on each station, where two line
interface cards are used as east working and protection line interface cards and two
line interface cards are used as west working and protection line interface cards. An
ODUk timeslot is specified in each line interface card to form an ODUk ring.
As Figure 5-21 shows, an ODUk service exists between Nodes 1 and 2 as well as
between Nodes 4 and 6 respectively. Under normal conditions, the service route
between node 1 and node 2 is the working channel of nodes 1↔2, and the service
route between node 4 and node 6 is the working channel of nodes 4↔5↔6.
Version: A 5-35
Figure 5-21 ODUk Ring Protection
When a fault occurs in the working channel of nodes 1↔2, the service between
nodes 4 and 6 will not be influenced, but the service between nodes 1 and 2 will be
influenced.
When nodes 1 and 2 detect that the fault meets the switchover condition, they
mutually transmit the APS information and perform bridging and switchover. The
service route between nodes 1 and 2 is the protection channel between node
1↔node 2. The protection route is in the same direction as the original service route
and is the near end route, as shown in Figure 5-22.
5-36 Version: A
Figure 5-22 Near End Switching in ODUk Ring Protection
When faults occur in both the working channel and protection channel of nodes
1↔2, the service between nodes 4 and 6 will not be influenced, but the service
between nodes 1 and 2 will be influenced. At this time, services of nodes 1 and 2
are carried over the remote end protection route (in the reverse direction of the
original service route) according to APS protocol, and the protection channel of
nodes 1↔6↔5↔4↔3↔2 is used, as shown in Figure 5-23.
Version: A 5-37
Figure 5-23 Remote End Switching in ODUk Ring Protection
The conditions for triggering the protection switchover are mainly the ODUk layer
alarms, for example, RS_LOF, RS_SD, OTU_LOF, ODU_AIS, ODU_OCI,
ODU_LCK, and PM_BIP8_SD.
5.2.7 Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection
The optical channel 1+1 protection is implemented via the OCP card. Each OCP
card supports two optical channel 1+1 protection groups. The principles and
methods of the two protection groups are the same. One group is used as an
example to describe the overview, protection parameters, function implementation,
and switchover trigger conditions of optical channel 1+1 wavelength protection.
5-38 Version: A
Overview
In the optical channel 1+1 wavelength protection, the OCP card is located between
the client side equipment and the tributary card, as shown in Figure 5-24. Through
the dual-feeding and selective-receiving function of the OCP card, the client signal
is sent to different service cards, that is, the service data is dual-fed to channels with
different wavelengths, thereby avoiding service interruption due to single service
card failure.
Table 5-11 lists the parameters for optical channel 1+1 wavelength protection.
Table 5-11 Parameters for Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection
Switching type Optical channel 1+1 wavelength protection
Revert mode Revertive or non-revertive Note 1

Note 1: The revert mode is determined by the actual configuration on the EMS.
As shown in Figure 5-24, in the service Tx direction, the OCP card dual feeds the
client signal to different service cards for processing. Two processed signals are
respectively sent to the local active and standby line OMUs and are then sent to the
opposite end over different optical lines after being multiplexed and amplified.
In the service Rx direction, the OCP card monitors the signal quality of the working
and protection channels according to the monitoring mode and alarm thresholds set
on the EMS, and determines whether to perform switching based on the alarms
such as ILS, SF (signal failure), and SD (signal deterioration).
Version: A 5-39
In normal situations, the OCP card sends the signals output by the corresponding
active line service card to the client. When detecting that the active wavelength
channel is faulty and the standby wavelength channel is normal (generally due to
the fault, the laser at the client side may be closed by the tributary card, thereby
triggering the switching of the OCP card), the OCP card sends the signals output by
the corresponding standby line service card to the client. When the active channel
recovers, the service signals can be determined whether to restore to the active
channel according to the revert type preconfigured on the EMS.
Figure 5-24 Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection
The conditions for triggering the optical channel wavelength protection are as
follows:
u ILS alarm: By default, the ILS alarm threshold is set to –25 dBm (the ILS alarm
threshold can be set on the EMS). In actual applications, the ILS threshold is
generally 5 dBm lower than the normal receiving optical power of the active /
standby optical interface of the protection card.
u Channel failure alarm, including the SF and SD:
5-40 Version: A
4 The SF alarms include OTUk layer alarms and ODUk T (TCMi) layer
alarms, such as OTN_LOF, ODUk_AIS, ODUk_OCI, ODUk_LCK, PM_AIS,
and TCMi_AIS.
4 The SD alarms include the alarms generated by monitoring the OTUk layer
and ODUk P/T layer errors, such as PM_BIP8_SD, TCMi_BIP8_SD, and
FEC_D_SD.
5.2.8 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection
The optical channel 1+1 protection is implemented via the OCP card. Each OCP
card supports two optical channel 1+1 protection groups. The principles and
methods of the two protection groups are the same. One group is used as an
example to describe the overview, protection parameters, function implementation,
and switching trigger conditions of the optical channel 1+1 route protection.
Overview
In this mode, the OCP cards are installed between the OTU cards and the ODU/
OMU cards. With the dual-feeding and selective-receiving function of the OCP
cards, the signals of specific wavelength from the service cards are sent to different
OMUs, i.e., the services are sent to different cable routes to implement the complete
service protection between the service cards at the local and opposite ends.
Table 5-12 shows parameters for optical channel 1+1 route protection.
Table 5-12 Parameters for Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection
Switching type Optical channel 1+1 route protection

Version: A 5-41
As Figure 5-25 shows, in the service Tx direction, the OCP card sends the signals,
which have gone through wavelength conversion via the OTU cards, to OMUs of the
active and standby lines respectively. After being multiplexed and amplified, the
signals are transmitted to the far end via different optical lines.
In the service Rx direction, the OCP card monitors the signal quality of the working
and protection channels according to the monitoring mode and alarm thresholds set
on the EMS, and determines whether to perform switching based on the alarms
such as ILS, SF (signal failure), and SD (signal deterioration).
In normal situations, the OCP card sends the wavelength signals output by the
corresponding active line ODUs to the service card. When detecting that the active
wavelength channel is faulty and the standby wavelength channel is normal, the
OCP card sends the wavelength signals output by the corresponding standby line
ODUs to the client. When the active channel recovers, the service signals can be
determined whether to be restored to the active channel according to the revert type
preconfigured on the EMS.
Figure 5-25 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection
5-42 Version: A
The conditions for triggering the optical channel wavelength protection are as
follows:
u ILS alarm: By default, the ILS alarm threshold is set to –25 dBm (the ILS alarm
threshold can be set on the EMS). In actual applications, the ILS threshold is
generally 5 dBm lower than the normal receiving optical power of the active /
standby optical interface of the protection card.
u Channel failure alarm, including the SF and SD:
4 The SF alarms include OTUk layer alarms and ODUk T (TCMi) layer
alarms, such as OTN_LOF, ODUk_AIS, ODUk_OCI, ODUk_LCK, PM_AIS,
and TCMi_AIS.
4 The SD alarms include the alarms generated by monitoring the OTUk layer
and ODUk P/T layer errors, such as PM_BIP8_SD, TCMi_BIP8_SD, and
FEC_D_SD.
5.2.9 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection
The following describes the overview, parameters, function implementation, and

switching trigger conditions of the 1+1 optical multiplex section protection.
Overview
The FONST 5000 U series of products provide OMSP card-based 1+1 optical
multiplex section protection and the protection switching time is less than 50 ms.
This protection covers an area between the local OMUs and ODUs in the far end or
between the local and far end optical add and drop multiplexing units to avoid
service interruption caused by the optical amplification unit failure, optical fiber line
degradation, or fiber interruption.
Version: A 5-43
Note:
The 1+1 optical multiplex section protection is implemented depending

on the received optical power. When only a few channels (fewer than four
channels) exist in the line, the optical power will be influenced
significantly. Therefore, the optical channel protection, rather than 1+1
optical multiplex section protection, is recommended.
Table 5-13 shows parameters for the 1+1 optical multiplex section protection.
Table 5-13 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection
Switching type 1+1 optical multiplex section protection

Figure 5-26 illustrates the 1+1 optical multiplex section protection.
In the service transmitting direction, the multiplexed signals are dual fed by the
OMSP card to the active and standby optical lines.
In the service receiving direction, the OMSP card ascertains the output signal power
from the PA card of the active and standby lines. In normal situations, the OMSP
card sends the output signals from the active line PA card to the ODU. When
detecting an ILS alarm (the ILS alarm threshold can be set on the EMS) generated
on the active line while the standby line is normal, the OMSP card sends the output
signals from the standby line PA card to the ODU. When the active channel
recovers, the service signals can be chosen whether to be restored to the active
channel according to the revert type preconfigured on the EMS.
5-44 Version: A
Figure 5-26 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection
The ILS alarm (the ILS alarm threshold can be set on the EMS). By default, the ILS
alarm threshold is +3 dBm. In actual applications, the ILS threshold is 5 dBm lower
than the normal received optical power of the active / standby optical interface of the
protection card.
5.2.10 Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1 Protection

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the optical line 1:1 / 1+1
protection of the FONST 5000 U series of products.
Version: A 5-45
Overview
The FONST 5000 U series of products provide OLP card-based optical line
protection. The OLP card is in the optical line segment, multiplexes and
demultiplexes the OSC signal and main optical signal, and monitors the received
optical signals. The OLP card provides 1:1 / 1+1 protection for the optical fibers in
the segment according to the monitoring results and 1:1 / 1+1 protection and
switching protocols, thereby avoiding service interruption due to optical fiber line
deterioration or interruption.
Table 5-14 describes the parameters for the line 1:1 / 1+1 protection.
Table 5-14 Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1 Protection Parameters
Unidirectional protection
Protection function Note 1
Bidirectional protection
Hold-off time (one hundred

0 (default)
milliseconds)
Recovery type Note 2 3 minutes (default)

Note 1: The protection functions are determined by the actual configuration on the EMS.
Note 2: When the revert type is set to No recovery, the protection is in the non-revertive mode.
1:1 Protection Function Implementation
Figure 5-27 shows the line 1:1 protection.
u In Tx direction: The OLP card multiplexes the optical supervisory signal of the
OSC card and the main channel optical signal of the OA card, and sends the
multiplexed signal to the active line or standby line over the intra-card optical
switch according to the 1:1 protection switching protocol.
u In Rx direction: The OLP card makes decisions on the power of the active and
standby line signals.
5-46 Version: A
In normal situations, the OLP card receives the active line signals. When
detecting the ILS alarm for the active line, the OLP card switches the
transmitting and receiving to the standby line by using the APS protocol.
Meanwhile, the OLP card splits the received signals to obtain the main channel
optical signal and optical supervisory signal, sends the main channel optical
signal to the PA card, and outputs the optical supervisory signal to the OSC
card.
1+1 Protection Function Implementation
Figure 5-27 shows the line 1+1 protection.
u In Tx direction: The OLP card multiplexes the optical supervisory signal of the
OSC card and the main channel optical signal of the OA card, and sends the
multiplexed signal to the active and standby line optical fibers.
u In Rx direction: The OLP card makes decisions on the power of the active and
standby line signals.
In normal situations, the OLP card receives the active line signal. When
detecting the ILS alarm for the active line, the OLP card receives the line signal
from the standby line. Meanwhile, the OLP card splits the received signals to
obtain the main channel optical signal and optical supervisory signal, sends the
main channel optical signal to the PA card, and outputs the optical supervisory
signal to the OSC card.
Figure 5-27 Optical Line 1:1/1+1 Protection
Version: A 5-47
ILS alarm for the OLP card (the receiving no light threshold can be set on the EMS).
By default, the receiving no light threshold is set to -30 dBm. In actual applications,
the receiving no light threshold is set to normal receiving optical power - 5 dBm.
5.2.11 Ethernet LAG Protection

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the Ethernet LAG protection of
the FONST 5000 U series of products.
Overview
The LAG is a method for binding a group of physical Ethernet interfaces with the
same rate as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and protect links. The
FONST 5000 U series of products support the UNILAG protection.
The Ethernet LAG protection can achieve the load balancing of ports. The ports of
the aggregation members are not in the active / standby mode. The FONST 5000 U
series of products can achieve intra-card LAG protection. When any port is faulty,
service packets are distributed to other ports for transmission.
Table 5-15 describes the parameters for the Ethernet LAG protection.
Table 5-15 Ethernet LAG Protection Parameters
Source MAC-based, destination MAC-based, and source and

Aggregation mode
destination MAC-based
Revert mode Revertive
The LAG can achieve the following functions:
5-48 Version: A
u Improving the link availability: In the port aggregation group, members back up
each other dynamically. When a port is faulty, other members can immediately
take over its services. The process for enabling the backup for port aggregation
is only associated with the ports in the aggregation group.
u Increasing link capacity: The port aggregation group can provide an economic
method for improving the link transmission rate. By binding multiple physical
ports, the user can obtain higher bandwidth without upgrading the existing
equipment. The capacity is the sum of the capacities of all physical links.
Figure 5-28 shows the Ethernet LAG protection supported by the FONST 5000 U
series of products.
Figure 5-28 Port Aggregation Protection
Switching Trigger Condition
Any link is faulty.
5.3 Network Management Information Protection
On the transport network, the network management information is transmitted over

the supervisory channel. Generally, the supervisory channel and service channel
use the unified physical channel. When the physical channel fails, the supervisory
channel will also fail, which causes out-of-management of partial NEs.
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the following network management
information protection modes.
Version: A 5-49
Network Management Information Protection in Ring Network Mode
When a certain optical path fails (such as the optical cable is damaged), the network
management information can automatically be transmitted over the supervisory
channel in another direction of ring network, so as to avoid affecting the entire
network management. This protection mode is included in the ring network
protection, and users do not need to add equipment sets or lines, as shown in
Figure 5-29.
Figure 5-29 Network Management Information Protection in Ring Network Mode
The ring network protection cannot avoid the NE out-of-management caused by the
failure of multiple optical paths in the ring network.
Standby Network Management Channel Protection
In an optical fiber ring network, if multiple optical paths fail, or a certain optical path
in the point-to-point or chain network fails, partial NEs will be out of management.
The network administrator, however, cannot obtain the supervisory information of
the failed stations or operate these stations. To avoid this condition, the network
administrator should set up the standby network management channel.
The FONST 5000 U series of products can provide the standby network
management information channel over the data communication network. Access
the NE needing the network management information protection in the data
communication network via a router, and set up the standby network management
information channel.
5-50 Version: A
When the network operates normally, the network management information is

transmitted via the active management channel. When the active management
channel fails, the network management information of the failed NE will be
automatically switched to the standby network management information channel for
transmission, as shown in Figure 5-30 and Figure 5-31.
Figure 5-30 Working and Protection Supervisory Channels - Normal
Version: A 5-51
Figure 5-31 Working and Protection Supervisory Channels - Faulty
5-52 Version: A
6 Application of Service Grooming
The following uses typical examples to introduce the application of FONST 5000 U
series of products in optical layer wavelength and electrical layer sub-wavelength
service grooming.
Optical Layer Grooming
Electrical Layer Grooming
Version: A 6-1
6.1 Optical Layer Grooming
The following describes the optical layer grooming of the FONST 5000 U series of
products, including the FOADM and ROADM applications.
6.1.1 Application of FOADM
The following uses a ring network as an example to describe the application of the
FOADM.
Generally, the FOADM is applied on the intermediate station in a chain or ring

network to implement the termination of local services and pass-through of signals
in the east and west directions.
Network Diagram
As shown in Figure 6-1, a ring network is composed of four stations (A, B, C and D)
in a project.
Figure 6-1 Application of FOADM – Network Diagram
6-2 Version: A
Service Demand
In this example, eight OTU2 services and eight OTU3 services are required
between station A and station B and between station A and station C respectively.
The eight OTU3 services are both required between station A and station D and
between station B and station C. The 1+1 backup is required in both directions for
each wavelength service.
Based on the previous analysis, the wavelength assignment between stations in this
example is shown in Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Application of FOADM – Service Demand
Signal Flow
u Station A
See Figure 6-3 for the signal flow corresponding to Station A.
Version: A 6-3
Figure 6-3 Application of FOADM – Signal Flow at Station A
u Station B
See Figure 6-4 for the signal flow corresponding to Station B.
6-4 Version: A
Figure 6-4 Application of FOADM – Signal Flow at Station B
u Station C and Station D
The signal flow of Station C and Station D is similar to that of Station B, only
different in adding / dropping and pass-through wavelength. Station C requires
adding / dropping of Channels 17 to 32 and Channels 41 to 48 as well as pass-
through of Channels 1 to 16 and Channels 33 to 40. Station D requires adding /
dropping of the Channels 33 to 40 as well as pass-through of Channels 1 to 32
and Channels 41 to 48.
Version: A 6-5
6.1.2 Application of ROADM
In the following, the service grooming in four directions is used as an example to

describe the application of the ROADM.
It is advisable to use N WSS8D and N WSS8M cards for the station that requires
dynamic wavelength grooming in N directions (N≤8) and configure one WSS8D
card and one WSS8M card in each direction for service adding / dropping and
multiplexing in the corresponding direction.
As shown in Figure 6-5, service grooming is required between west 2 and either of
east 2, east 1, and west 1. After learning the service grooming direction of this case,
you can understand the service grooming method between east 2, east 1 or west 1
and other direction.
Network Diagram
As shown in Figure 6-5, a star network is formed by Stations A, B, C, D, and E in a

project. Station A is an ROADM with four WSS8D cards and four WSS8M cards,
and the other stations are OTMs.
Figure 6-5 Application of ROADM – Network Diagram
6-6 Version: A
Service Demand
In this example, eight services are to be established between Station A and other
stations, and four services are to be established between Station E and Stations B,
C and D respectively. See Figure 6-6 for the wavelength assignment between
stations.
Figure 6-6 Application of ROADM – Service Demand
Signal Flow
u Station A
The signal flows of dropping and adding services corresponding to Station A

are shown in Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 respectively. The optical transponder
unit corresponding to the 1st to the 44th services and the OSC and OSCAD
units in each direction are omitted in the figure. See Application of FOADM for
information about the signal flow of the omitted part.
Version: A 6-7
Figure 6-7 Application of ROADM – Dropping Signal Flow at Station A
6-8 Version: A
Figure 6-8 Application of ROADM – Adding Signal Flow at Station A
The following describes the signal flow in the W2 and E2 directions. The signal
flow in the W1 and E1 directions is similar to that in the E2 direction.
4 In the Rx end of W2 direction
Services from the W2 line are input via the LI port of the WSS8D card (W2),
including services of Stations E → A as well as through-connected
services of Stations E → B, Stations E → C, and Stations E → D at Station
A.
The eight services from Station E to Station A pass through the D1 port of
the local card, the ODU, the line card (Rx), the cross-connect card, and the
interface card (Tx) in sequence and are terminated at the local station.
Version: A 6-9
Services of the 33rd to 36th channels from Station E to Station B, the 37th
to 40th channels from Station E to Station C, and the 41st to 44th channels
from Station E to Station D pass transparently through Station A and are
sent to the “MI” ports of the WSS8M (W1), WSS8M (E1) and WSS8M (E2)
cards respectively via the ports "D7", "D6", and "D8" of the WSS8D (W2)
card, as indicated by the bold lines in Figure 6-7.
4 In the Tx end of W2 direction
Services transmitted in the W2 direction include services of Stations A → E,

Stations B → E, Stations C → E, and Stations D → E. Services of the 25th
to the 32nd channels from Station A to Station E, after being multiplexed
by the OMU, are sent to the A1 port on the WSS8M (W2) card.
Services of the 33rd to 36th channels from Station B to Station E, the 37th
to 40th channels from Station C to Station E, and the 41st to 44th channels
from Station D to Station E pass transparently through Station A, and are
sent to the ports A7, A6 and A8 of the WSS8M (W2) card via the MO ports
of the WSS8D (W1), WSS8D (E1) and WSS8D (E2) cards respectively, as
indicated by the bold lines in Figure 6-8.
The aforesaid services are multiplexed by the WSS8M (W2) card, and
outputted via the LO port on the card to the line.
4 In the E2 direction
The services of channels 17 to 24 from Station D to Station A and services

of channels 41 to 44 from Station D to Station E are input from the LI
interface of the WSS8D (E2) card. The services from Station D to Station A
are demultiplexed on the WSS8D card and are output via the D1 to D8
interfaces and terminated at the local station after passing the line card Rx
→ the cross-connect card → the tributary card Tx. The services from
Station D to Station E are directly sent to the A8 interface of the WSS8M
(W2) card via the MO interface.
The services of channels 17 to 24 from Station A to Station D are input

from interfaces A1 to A8 of the WSS8M (E2) card, and are multiplexed with
the services, input from the MI interface, of channels 41 to 44 from Station
E to Station D. Then, the WSS8M (E2) card outputs the multiplexed
signals to the line via the LO interface.
u Station B
6-10 Version: A
The signal flow of Station B is shown in Figure 6-9.
Figure 6-9 Application of ROADM – Signal Flow at Station B
In the Tx direction, the signals over channels 1 to 8 from Station B to Station A

and the signals over channels 33 to 36 from Station B to Station E are
multiplexed by the OMU, amplified by the OA, and then output to the line; in the
Rx direction, the signals over channels 1 to 8 from Station A to Station B and
the signals over channels 33 to 36 from Station E to Station B are
demultiplexed by the ODU, transmitted over the line card Rx, the cross-connect
card, and the tributary card Tx, and finally output to the equipment on the client
side.
u Stations C, D and E
The signal flow of Stations C, D and E is basically the same as that of Station B,
only different in the adding / dropping wavelengths, and we will not go further
on this issue here.
6.2 Electrical Layer Grooming
The following describes the centralized electrical layer grooming of the FONST
Version: A 6-11
6.2.1 Application of Electrical Layer Grooming
The following describes the electrical grooming application scenarios.
Pass-through of Client Side Services at Local Station
Services are input from a client side port of the local station and are output to
another client side port. The service transmission does not involve the optical fiber
lines, as shown in Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-10 Pass-through of Client Side Services at Local Station
Service Add/Drop Line on the Client Side
This is the most common mode of electrical layer grooming. In this mode, services
from other stations are transmitted to the local station via the optical fiber line and
then output. Or, the client services are input at the local station, and then transmitted
to other stations via the optical fiber line, as shown in Figure 6-11.
6-12 Version: A
Figure 6-11 Service Add/Drop Line on the Client Side
Pass-Through of Line Side Services at Local Station
The services are not added / dropped at the local station. The local station serves
as a regeneration station to transmit the services from the optical fiber line on one
side to the optical fiber line on the other side, as shown in Figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12 Pass-Through of Line Side Services at Local Station
6.2.2 Examples of Electrical Grooming (OTN)
The following describes the electrical grooming and configuration methods of OTN
application of the FONST 5000 U series of products using examples.
Version: A 6-13
Network Diagram
In a project, stations A, B, C, D, and E form a chain network, as shown in

Figure 6-13.
Figure 6-13 Network Diagram – Example of Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN)
Service Demand
u 320 GE services are provisioned between stations A and B.
u Six OTU3 services are provisioned between stations A and E.
u Eight OTU4 services are provisioned between stations A and E.
u Forty 10GE services are provisioned between stations B and D.
u Six OTU3 services are provisioned between stations B and D.
u 320 GE services are provisioned between stations D and E.
Demand Analysis
The analysis of the electrical layer service wavelength distribution for stations A and
E is as follows:
u 320 GE services require twenty 16TN1 cards and four 1LN4 cards and occupy
four 100 Gbit/s channels.
u Six OTU3 services require six 1TO3 cards and three 1LN4 cards and occupy
three 100 Gbit/s channels.
u Eight OTU4 services require eight 1TN4 cards and eight 1LN4 cards and
occupy eight 100 Gbit/s channels.
6-14 Version: A
The analysis of the electrical layer service wavelength distribution for stations B and
D is as follows:
u 320 GE services require twenty 16TN1 cards and four 1LN4 cards and occupy
u Forty 10GE services require two 20TP2 cards and four 1LN4 cards and occupy
u Six OTU3 services require six 1TO3 cards and three 1LN4 cards and occupy
three 100 Gbit/s channels.
Figure 6-14 shows the wavelength distribution between stations.
Figure 6-14 Service Demand – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN)
Card Configuration
Station A and station E use the FONST 5000 U60 subrack and the COTP subrack.
Figure 6-15 shows the card configuration.
Version: A 6-15
Figure 6-15 Card Slot Configuration at Stations A and E – Electrical Layer Grooming
Application (OTN)
Station B and station D use the FONST 5000 U40 subrack and the COTP subrack.
Figure 6-16 shows the card configuration.
6-16 Version: A
Figure 6-16 Card Slot Configuration at Stations B and D – Electrical Layer Grooming
Application (OTN)
Station C uses the COTP subrack. Figure 6-17 shows the card configuration.
Figure 6-17 Card Slot Configuration at Station C – Electrical Layer Grooming Application
(OTN)
Version: A 6-17
Signal Flow
u Station A
The signal flow of Station A is shown in Figure 6-18. According to the service
requirements, station A adds and drops 15 services from stations B and E. The
wavelength services of the ODU48-O card are not highlighted. The signal flow
of the ODU48-O card is similar to that of the VMU48-O card but is in a reverse
direction.
Figure 6-18 Signal Flow at Station A – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN)
The signal flow of station A is as follows:
4 The 320 GE service signals from the client side equipment undergo the O /
E conversion implemented by twenty 16TN1 cards and are processed into
320 ODU0 signals and sent to the cross-connect card. Based on the EMS
configuration, the cross-connect card sends the 320 ODU0 signals to four
1LN4 cards. After being multiplexed and converted by the 1LN4 cards to
100G signals with one to four wavelengths, the signals are sent to the
VMU48-O card.
6-18 Version: A
4 The six OTU3 service signals from the client side equipment undergo the
O / E conversion implemented by six 1TO3 cards and are processed into
six ODU3 signals and sent to the cross-connect card. Based on the EMS
configuration, the cross-connect card sends the six ODU3 signals to three
1LN4 cards. After being multiplexed and converted by the 1LN4 cards to
100G signals with 12 to 14 wavelengths, the signals are sent to the
VMU48-O card.
4 The eight OTU4 service signals from the client side equipment undergo the
O / E conversion implemented by eight 1TN4 cards and are processed into
eight ODU4 signals and sent to the cross-connect card. Based on the EMS
configuration, the cross-connect card sends the eight ODU4 signals to
eight 1LN4 cards. After being multiplexed and converted by the 1LN4
cards to 100G signals with 15 to 22 wavelengths, the signals are sent to
the VMU48-O card.
The VMU48-O card multiplexes all wavelength signals, and then the OA card
amplifies the signals. After being multiplexed with the supervisory signals from
the OSC card by the OSCAD card, the signals are output to the line.
The signal flow in the Rx direction is a reverse process of the signal flow in the
Tx direction.
u Station B
The signal flow of Station B is shown in Figure 6-19. According to the service
requirements, station B needs to add and drop four services from station A and
seven services from station D, and pass through 11 services of stations A and
E.
Version: A 6-19
Figure 6-19 Signal Flow at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN)
The signal flow of station B is as follows:
4 Add and drop services:
¡ The 320 GE service signals from the client side equipment undergo
the O / E conversion implemented by twenty 16TN1 cards and are
processed into 320 ODU0 signals and sent to the cross-connect card.
Based on the EMS configuration, the cross-connect card sends the
320 ODU0 signals to four 1LN4 cards. After being multiplexed and
converted by the 1LN4 cards to 100G signals with one to four
wavelengths, the signals are sent to the west VMU48-O card.
6-20 Version: A
¡ The forty 10GE LAN service signals from the client side equipment
undergo the O / E conversion implemented by two 20TP2 cards and
are processed into 40 ODU2 signals that are sent to the cross-
connect card. Based on the EMS configuration, the cross-connect
card sends the forty ODU2 signals to four 1LN4 cards. After being
multiplexed and converted by the 1LN4 cards to 100G signals with
five to eight wavelengths, the signals are sent to the west VMU48-O
card.
¡ The six OTU3 service signals from the client side equipment undergo
the O / E conversion implemented by six 1TO3 cards and are
processed into six ODU3 signals and sent to the cross-connect card.
Based on the EMS configuration, the cross-connect card sends the
six ODU3 signals to three 1LN4 cards. After being multiplexed and
converted by the 1LN4 cards to 100G signals with 9 to 11
wavelengths, the signals are sent to the VMU48-O card.
The signal flow in the Rx direction is a reverse process of the signal flow in
the Tx direction.
4 Pass-through services:
¡ From west to east
The 12th to 22nd channel of services from the line in the west
direction (from station A) are amplified by the PA card and sent to the
ODU48-O card in the west direction and to the VMU48-O card in the
east direction over the intra-station fiber pigtail.
The VMU48-O card in the east direction multiplexes all wavelength

signals and then the OA card in the east direction amplifies the signals.
After being multiplexed with the supervisory signals from the OSC
card by the OSCAD card in the east direction, the signals are output to
the line in the east direction.
¡ From east to west
The signal flow from east to west is a reverse process of the signal
flow from west to east.
u Station C
Version: A 6-21
See Figure 6-20 for the signal flow of station C. According to the service
requirements, station C amplifies the optical power of the line to achieve long-
haul optical regeneration transmission.
Figure 6-20 Signal Flow at Station C – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN)
The signal flow of station C is as follows:
4 From west to east
The service signals from the line in the west direction (from station B) are
amplified by the PA card at the west direction, amplified by the OA card at
the east direction and sent to the OSCAD card in the east direction, and
then multiplexed with the supervisory signals from the OSC card by the
OSCAD card in the east direction and output to the line in the east
direction.
4 From east to west
The signal flow from east to west is a reverse process of the signal flow
from west to east.
u Stations D and E
The signal flow of station D is similar to that of station A, and the signal flow of
station E is similar to that of station B, which are not further described here.
6.2.3 Examples of Electrical Grooming (PIC)
The following describes the electrical grooming and configuration methods of PIC
application of the FONST 5000 U series of products using examples.
6-22 Version: A
Network Diagram
As shown in Figure 6-21, a chain network is composed of three stations (A, B, and C)
in a project.
Figure 6-21 Network Diagram – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)
Service Demand
u Ten 10GE LAN services are activated in stations A and B.
u Ten 10GE LAN services are activated in stations B and C.
u Ten OTU2 services are activated in stations A and C.
Demand Analysis
The analysis of the electrical layer service wavelength distribution for stations A and
C is as follows:
Ten 10GE LAN services and ten OTU2 services require five 4TN2 cards and two
10IL2 cards and occupy twenty 10 Gbit/s channels.
The analysis of the electrical layer service wavelength distribution for station B is as
follows:
u Ten 10GE services in the west direction require three 4TN2 cards and one
10IL2 card and occupy ten 10 Gbit/s channels.
u Ten 10GE services in the east direction require three 4TN2 cards and one
10IL2 card and occupy ten 10 Gbit/s channels.
Figure 6-22 shows the wavelength distribution between stations.
Version: A 6-23
Figure 6-22 Service Requirement – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)
Card Configuration
All stations use the FONST 5000 U10 subrack. Figure 6-23 shows the card
configuration of stations A and C, and Figure 6-24 shows the card configuration of
station B.
Figure 6-23 Card Slot Configuration at Stations A and C – Electrical Layer Grooming
Application (PIC)
Figure 6-24 Card Slot Configuration at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)
6-24 Version: A
Signal Flow
u Station A
The signal flow of Station A is shown in Figure 6-25. According to the service
requirements, station A adds and drops 20 services of the other two stations.
Figure 6-25 Signal Flow at Station A – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)
The signal flow of station A is as follows:
4 The ten 10GE service signals and ten OTU2 service signals from the client
side equipment undergo the O / E conversion by five 4TN2 cards and sent
to the cross-connect card. According to the EMS configuration, the cross-
connect card sends 20 signals to two 10IL2 cards. After being multiplexed
and converted by the 10IL2 card, two optical signals are sent to the
BMD2PP card.
4 After two optical signals are multiplexed by the BMD2PP card, the signals
are then multiplexed with the supervisory signals from the OSC card and
output to the line.
The signal flow in the Rx direction is a reverse process of the signal flow in the
Tx direction.
u Station B
Version: A 6-25
The signal flow of Station B is shown in Figure 6-26. According to the service
demand, station B terminates ten 10GE LAN service signals from station A,
and the ten OTU2 service signals from station A and station C pass
transparently through station B.
Figure 6-26 Signal Flow at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)
The signal flow of station B is as follows:
The service signals from the line in the west direction (from station A) are sent
to the BMD2PP card in the west direction for demultiplexing.
4 The CE11 to CE20 signals (10×10GE LAN services of A→B) are sent to
the 10IL2 card in the west direction for demultiplexing and local dropping of
the electrical layer services. The signals are terminated locally via three
4TN2 cards.
4 The CE22 to CE31 signals (electrical layer services of A→C) are sent to
the BMD2PP card in the east direction for pass-through in the optical layer.
6-26 Version: A
4 After all the wavelength signals are multiplexed by the BMD2PP card in the
east direction, the signals are multiplexed with the supervisory signals from
the OSC card and then output to the line in the east direction.
The service signals from the line in the east direction (from station C) are sent
to the BMD2PP card in the east direction for demultiplexing.
4 The CE11 to CE20 signals (10×10GE services of C→B) are sent to the
10IL2 card in the east direction for demultiplexing and local dropping of the
electrical layer services. The signals are terminated locally via three 4TN2
cards.
4 The CE22 to CE31 signals (electrical layer services of C→A) are sent to
the BMD2PP card in the west direction for pass-through in the optical
layer.
4 After all the wavelength signals are multiplexed by the BMD2PP card in the
west direction, the signals are multiplexed with the supervisory signals
from the OSC card and then output to the line in the west direction.
u Station C
The signal flow of station C is similar to that of station A, which will not be
further described here.
Version: A 6-27
7 About ASON
The ASON is a new-generation optical transport network, also known as intelligent

optical network. The ASON introduces the control plane on the optical transport
network, thereby achieving the automatic discovery of network resources, providing
flexible service automatic configuration and various protection and restoration
mechanisms, and addressing the issue of low network resource utilization rate.
The following describes the ASON based on the FONST 5000 U series of products,
and introduces basic concepts and solutions.
Background and Introduction of the ASON
Architecture of the ASON System
Basic Concepts of the ASON
ASON Solution
ASON Functions
Version: A 7-1
7.1 Background and Introduction of the ASON
The following describes the background, development, and introduction of the

ASON.
7.1.1 Background of the ASON
With the development of telecommunications networks and increasing customer

demand, problems with traditional optical networks have gradually been exposed.
The details are described as follows:
u Service configuration
In the service configuration for traditional optical networks, massive cross-

connect data analysis and designs as well as ring-to-ring and point-to-point
manual configurations are required, which are time-consuming and labor-
intensive. With the expanding network scales and increasingly complicated
network systems, this type of service configuration can no longer meet the
rapidly increasing customer demand.
u Bandwidth utilization rate
The protection mode of a traditional optical network requires a large capacity

for backup, which leads to a low network bandwidth utilization rate.
u Protection mode
To implement protection, the traditional optical networks generally need to

reserve half the network resources as backup. This lowers the network
bandwidth utilization ratio. In addition, in this protection mode, services are
protected to the same extent without considering importance weights of various
services, and traditional optical networks also fail to protect services effectively
when faults occur at several points.
To solve these problems effectively, the ASON is launched. It introduces signaling to

the transport network and provides the control plane to enhance network connection
management and fault correction capability. It supports end-to-end service
configuration and provides different service protection modes based on importance
and priority of services to meet various customer demands. In addition, the ASON
can implement network protection when faults occur at multiple points.
7-2 Version: A
7 About ASON
7.1.2 Development of the ASON
With regard to standard development, the ASON standards are rather mature now.
The three organizations for standardization, ITU-T, IETF and OIF, have set up
principal standards about the ASON, and the ASON functions are well developed.
Complete and mature standards accelerate commercialization of the ASON. The
SDH-based ASON equipment is widely applied on the network. With the evolution
of the backbone transport network towards OTN, the ASON technologies are
gradually applied to the OTN-based transport plane.
The ASON technology is a control technology independent from the transport

technology and uses the universal GMPLS protocol. The ASON technology can be
used on various transport products. For example, equipped on the SDH product, it
becomes an SDH-based ASON, which is now widely used. Equipped on the OTN
product, it becomes an OTN-based WSON. In this way, various transport layers on
the entire network can be uniformly controlled by the ASON, thereby achieving
unified grooming and control of end-to-end service by the ASON and network
intelligentization.
7.1.3 Introduction of the ASON
The ASON concepts and standards are introduced after wide applications of the
SDH or DWDM optical transport networks. Therefore, reasonable introduction
schemes are essential. The following describes two basic ASON introduction
schemes.
u Setting up a new ASON
To set up a new optical network, the ASON products can be used directly.
u Upgrading the existing network to ASON
If FiberHome OTN or FonsWeaver series of products have been deployed on

the existing network, new software can be loaded to upgrade the existing
network to the ASON network. This upgrade mode does not require new
equipment and can effectively protect the existing investments and save
construction cost.
Version: A 7-3
7.2 Architecture of the ASON System
As shown in Figure 7-1, the ASON is composed of the control plane, the
management plane, and the transport plane. The figure also indicates all reference
interfaces related to the architecture of the ASON system.
Figure 7-1 Structure of the ASON System
The control plane, the most featured key part of the ASON, is composed of
functional modules, e.g., routing, signaling transfer and resource management, and
signaling networks of signal transport and control to perform call management and
connection management. With interfaces, protocols and signaling systems, the
control plane can dynamically exchange topology information, routing information
and other control signals of the optical network, dynamically set up or tear down
optical channels, implement the dynamic assignment of network resources and
recover the connection when a fault occurs.
7-4 Version: A
7 About ASON
The management plane performs distributed and intelligent management functions.

The management system of traditional optical transport networks has been replaced
by a new multi-layer management system based on the transport plane, control
plane and signaling networks. The new system provides a comprehensive optical
network management solution characterized by centralized, distributed and
intelligent management that caters for both the maintenance management
requirements for operators (management plane) and the dynamic service demands
of users (control plane). The ASON management plane and control plane
complement each other to perform the dynamic configuration of network resources,
performance monitoring, fault management and route planning.
The transport plane is composed of a series of transport entities, including intelligent

SDH and OTN products. As a channel to transport services, it supports
unidirectional or bidirectional end-to-end user information transport. In addition, the
transport plane is hierarchically structured and supports the multi-granularity
switching, an important physical supporting technique to implement ASON traffic
engineering. It supports flexible bandwidth allocation and access of multiple
services, and is the evolution trend of the ASON technology in the future.
7.3 Basic Concepts of the ASON
The ASON is composed of intelligent NEs. It performs the signaling transmission,

switching, information multiplexing, and cross-connect on the optical fiber network.
These intelligent NEs store the network topology and routing information of the
entire network and perform the automatic service set-up or tear-down via signaling.
According to the networking model, the ASON mainly consists of intelligent NEs, as
Version: A 7-5
Figure 7-2 ASON Network Model
The following describes some concepts related to the ASON.
Intelligent NE
An intelligent NE is composed of a traditional optical transport NE and a control unit

loaded with the intelligent software SmartWeaver. Compared with traditional NEs,
the intelligent NEs are added with the link management, signaling, and routing
functions.
TE Link
A Traffic Engineering (TE) link is a logical link between adjacent nodes. An

intelligent NE transports its information (like bandwidth) to other intelligent NEs in
the network in the form of TE link to provide evidence for route calculation. Multiple
TE links can exist between two nodes, and one TE line can be bound to multiple
data links.
The TE links used on the ASON based on the FONST 5000 U series of products are
classified into optical layer TE links and electrical layer TE links. The control plane
establishes end-to-end services using the information about the optical layer TE link
and electrical layer TE link.
7-6 Version: A
7 About ASON
u Optical layer TE link
After the fibers between the WSS cards at two intelligent NEs are connected
and the OSC / ESC channel is set up, the control plane can automatically
create the corresponding optical layer TE link, which contains available optical
layer wavelength and bandwidth information.
u Optical layer TE link
After the ESC communication is established between the local line card and the
opposite end line card, the control plane automatically creates the
corresponding electrical layer TE link that carries information such as slot
number, wavelength, and bandwidth.
Figure 7-3 shows the positioning of the optical layer TE link and electrical layer TE
link.
Figure 7-3 Positioning of the TE Link
Control Channel
The control channel is a physical channel between nodes to transport signals

created and maintained between adjacent nodes via the LMP protocol. Control
channels are classified into in-band channels and out-of-band channels. The in-
band control channel uses the OTN overhead or OSC overhead byte, and the out-
of-band control channel uses the Ethernet link that requires manual configuration of
the IP address of each control plane.
Version: A 7-7
PC (Permanent Connection)
PC is a service connection set up through configuration on the network

management system to deliver commands to NEs.
SC (Switching Connection)
SC is a service connection set up by the control plane via signaling after the
terminal user (i.e., a router) initiates a call to the ASON control plane.
Note:
The software of the current version supports SPC and PC services only.
SPC (Soft-Permanent Connection)
SPC is a service connection between the PC and SC. The connection from the user
to the transport network is directly configured on the EMS. The internal connection
of the transport network is completed by the control plane using signaling after the
EMS initiates a request to the control plane. The service granularity of the SPC
includes OCh and ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and flex).
LSP (Label Switch Path)
The LSP refers to the path that the intelligent service passes by. In the ASON, to set
up intelligent services is to set up LSPs. See Figure 7-4 for the paths that the SPC
service passes by, i.e., LSPs.
Figure 7-4 LSP
7-8 Version: A
7 About ASON
u The intelligent wavelength division OCh path can be created when sufficient
optical TE link resources exist.
u The intelligent wavelength division ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, ODU4 and
ODUflex paths can be created when sufficient optical TE link resources exist.
Routing Policy
A routing policy is a way to determine the priority of alternative routes in the process
of route calculation. The route selection policies for the active and standby paths
include node diversity, link diversity and SRLG diversity.
During route calculation, the route calculation module uses the CSPF algorithm to
calculate the routes complying with the conditions. At present, the SmartWeaver
supports the following routing policies: minimum nodes, minimum link cost, and load
balancing.
u Minimum nodes
As to minimum nodes, it is to calculate the best route from the source node to
the destination node as a route that passes by a minimum of nodes. As shown
in Figure 7-5 , the routes involving the minimum nodes between node 1 (source
node) and node 3 (sink node) is 1↔2↔3, that is, the path pointed by the
arrowheads.
Figure 7-5 The Minimum Node Number
u Minimum link cost
Version: A 7-9
Link cost is a parameter to ascertain link priority. The value can be set as fiber
length, fiber cost, link loss or other reference items. As shown in Figure 7-6 , the
number between the two nodes indicates the link cost. The routes involving the
minimum link cost between node 1 (source node) and node 3 (sink node) is
1↔5↔4↔3, that is, the path pointed by the arrowheads.
Figure 7-6 The Lowest Link Cost
Load Balancing
Load balancing is aimed to distribute services evenly into network resources. It

allows abundant network resources, gives little restriction to new service routes and
alleviates the protection and recovery pressure when the network fails.
The FONST 5000 U series of products measure the load as follows: convert the
unallocated timeslots of all TE links that the route passes to the same signal type
(such as ODU0), and use the minimum number of timeslots as the principle for
measuring the load, which is known as load parameter.
With the load parameter, it is possible to compare loads of all possible routes. The
route with the smallest load (with the largest value of the parameter) is the best
route.
If this method is directly used, routers with small load but many hop counts (hop
count = the number of nodes that a route passes by－1) will occur and consume a
large number of network resources. In practical application, the hop counts of the
available routes should be taken into consideration as well as load conditions. The
formula below can be used to choose the best among the available routes.
7-10 Version: A
7 About ASON
f = load parameter/(hop count of available routes)2. The route with the largest f value
is the best route. The load is the minimum bandwidth of the link over the path.
As shown in Figure 7-7, the number between two nodes is the load parameter.
Calculation of the load balance is shown in Table 7-1. It can be known from the
table that the best route is route 1.
Figure 7-7 Load Balancing
Table 7-1 Calculation of Load Balance for Choosing a Route
Route Load Parameter Hop Count f Value Note 1
Route 1: 1↔2↔3 32 2 8
Route 5: 1↔5↔4↔3 64 3 7.1
2
Note 1: f = load parameter/(hop count of available routes) .
Routing Policy Priority
When establishing services, users can select only one routing strategy. However,
several best routes may coexist when a single routing strategy is used. In this case,
the SmartWeaver will choose the best route according to the routing policies with
the priority like this: the routing strategy appointed by users > minimum nodes >
minimum link cost > load balancing. If multiple best routes still exist with the
aforesaid work of routing strategies, a route of them will be chosen randomly.
Re-routing
Re-routing is a way to recover services. When the LSP of the service breaks up, the
initial node will calculate the best route for service recovery and a new LSP will be
set up via signaling to transport services. When a new LSP is established, the
original LSP will be removed.
Version: A 7-11
Note:
As to revertive services, when re-routing is implemented, the original LSP

will not be removed.
Soft Re-routing
The soft re-routing refers to the re-routing operations initiated by the OTNM2000 for
network maintenance or optimization.
Revertive
Revertive means that services can be restored to the original route automatically or
manually after faults on the original route are removed.
SRLG
SRLG is a link group that share the risks. Normally, fibers in the same optical cable
share the same risks. When intelligent services interrupt, the control plane will not
choose the link route with the same risk, so as to shorten the time of recovery for
intelligent services in re-routing.
For example, when a cable is cut off, all the fibers in the cable may probably be cut
off. The fibers in this cable form an SRLG. Users can also set any several fibers or a
TE link in an SRLG as desired.
7.4 ASON Solution
The following introduces the products and network solutions that apply the ASON
technology.
7.4.1 Product System
The ASON product system of the FONST 5000 U series of products is divided by
layer into the control plane, transport plane, management plane, and planning tool.
Figure 7-8 shows the relationship between layers.
7-12 Version: A
7 About ASON
Figure 7-8 Product Relationships on Each Layer
Control Plane
The SmartWeaver software is the major functional software of the control plane.
This software is pre-installed in the CCU card of the FONST 5000 U series of
products.
Transport Plane
The FONST 5000 U series of products include FONST 5000 U60, FONST 5000
U40, FONST 5000 U30, FONST 5000 U20, and FONST 5000 U10.
Management Plane
The management plane functions are implemented by the OTNM2000 Element

Management System (EMS). The system supports four management functions,
including performance management, fault management, configuration management,
and security management. In addition, the system provides the graphical user
interface (GUI), which ensures flexible and convenient operations.
Version: A 7-13
Planning Tool
The OTNPlanner is a network planning and optimization tool tailored for

transmission network equipment. It provides such functions as network topology
planning, service protection and route design, wavelength assignment, automatic
equipment configuration, physical impairment calculation, network optimization
calculation, output of statistical analysis reports, and data interaction with the
7.4.2 Solution
FiberHome can provide intelligent transmission network solutions for different types
of networks, such as inter-province trunk networks (level-1), intra-province trunk
networks (level-2), local networks, and Metropolitan Area Networks (MANs).
Equipment is selected and the network is planned according to the network's
requirements for the traffic, service types, and networking. Figure 7-9 shows a
solution for transmission from the MAN to the inter-province trunk network (level-1).
7-14 Version: A
7 About ASON
Figure 7-9 OTN ASON Solution
7.4.3 System Features
The following introduces the ASON system features of the FONST 5000 U series of
products.
Version: A 7-15
CCU 1+1 Hot Backup
The CCU is the entity corresponding to the control plane and loaded with the
SmartWeaver intelligent software. It uses the built-in card installation mode and
mainly provides the route selection, signaling forwarding, and resource
management functions.
This system supports the CCU 1+1 hot backup. Once the active CCU encounters a
software or a hardware failure, the standby CCU enters the working status from the
hot backup status and automatically takes over the services of the faulty CCU. The
set-up services are not affected even when both active and standby CCUs are faulty.
The CCUs can still control the service after being restarted. The system reliability
and availability have thereby been enhanced, and better service quality is provided.
Automatic Discovery of Network Resources and Topology Architecture
The network resources here refer to TE links, and topology refers to the connection
between intelligent NEs, optical fibers and TE links. Different from the traditional
transport equipment, the ASON does not require manual configuration of the
network structure. The intelligent NE records the interconnection among optical
interfaces and reports the interconnection information to the CCU and EMS.
Compatibility with Traditional Networks
The traditional network can be upgraded to the intelligent network smoothly. If the
existing network has been already deployed with the intelligent FONST 5000 U
series of products, it can be smoothly upgraded to an ASON network by loading the
intelligent software.
The flexible resource allocation mechanism effectively solves the coexistence

problem of the traditional and intelligent networks. If a certain resource is occupied
by the PC services (traditional network), the resource will not be in the available
resource list of the SPC services.
Flexible Service Implementation
As a multi-service provider platform, the system provides many service types,

including BoD (Bandwidth on Demand), OVPN (Optical Virtual Private Network), GE
and SDH.
7-16 Version: A
7 About ASON
Intelligent and easy service set-up and flexible bandwidth assignment enhance
operators’ capability of providing BoD. The application of point-to-point and
multicast and independent logical channel for every service enhances operators’
capability of implementing OVPN.
Differentiated Services
The system provides differentiated services, including services in platinum level,

gold level, silver level and bronze level. Multiple routing strategies are provided for
each service type.
7.4.4 Architecture of Intelligent Software SmartWeaver
The intelligent software SmartWeaver is the major functional software of the control
plane in the FiberHome ASON solutions. This software is pre-installed in the CCU
card. Figure 7-10 shows the software architecture, including the traffic management
module, the signaling module, the route module, the cross-connect control module,
and the resource discovery and management module.
Figure 7-10 Architecture of the Intelligent Software SmartWeaver
Table 7-2 describes the sub-modules and functions of each module.
Version: A 7-17
Table 7-2 Modules and Functions of the Intelligent Software SmartWeaver
Module Sub-Module Function

Network
Provides proxy functions for the network management
management
system to visit the system management database.
system proxy
Traffic management Traffic

Stores and manages service information submitted by
module information
users.
base
Label base
Manages labels required by service set-up.
management
Route
Collects and floods TE link information.
management
Route module
Route Calculates the service route based on service
calculation constraint conditions.
Provides signaling support for set-up, tear-down,
synchronization and correction of services based on
Signaling module –
the Resource Reservation Protocol Traffic Engineering
(RSVP-TE) protocol.
Data link Converts information on the bottom layer of data links

Resource discovery
management and monitors status of data link interfaces.
and management
Link Discovers and maintains link resources, and sets up
module
management and maintains the control channels.
Cross-connect Calculates cross-connect of the equipment based on

Cross-connect control service routes and protection features.
control module Cross-connect Converts logical commands of cross-connect control to
proxy cross-connect commands readable to equipment.
7.5 ASON Functions
The following describes the functions of the FONST 5000 U series of products using
the ASON technology.
7.5.1 Automatic Discovery of Link Resource
The following describes the automatic discovery of ASON link resources of the
7-18 Version: A
7 About ASON
Automatic Discovery of Network Topology
The network topology includes the optical fiber link and the optical channel link
between intelligent NEs. After the completion of fiber connection between intelligent
NEs, the intelligent NEs will record the fiber connection information, including cards
and optical interfaces of the local and opposite ends. The SmartWeaver can
automatically create network topology diagrams based on this information. When
the fiber connection in the network changes , the network can automatically detect
the change via the LMP protocol and display the real time update on the GUI of the
Automatic Discovery of TE Link and Topology
After creating the control channel between adjacent NEs via the LMP protocol, the
intelligent NEs implement TE link check. After that, every intelligent NE can flood its
TE link information via the OSPF-TE protocol to the entire network. In this way, all
NEs receive the TE link information of the entire network, i.e. TE link topology of the
network, which will be finally displayed on the GUI of the network management
system.
In addition, the SmartWeaver can detect any change in the TE link, including links
added, changes in link parameters and links removed, and report to the network
management system for real time display.
Fiber Misconnection Monitoring
With an increasing integration level of card interfaces, fiber misconnection may

occur more frequently. The fiber misconnection monitoring provided by the
intelligent optical network is a good solution. As shown in Figure 7-11, when the Tx
and Rx fibers are misconnected between two ports (as indicated by the dotted lines
in Figure 7-11), the network management system will give an alarm based on the
misconnection information reported by the SmartWeaver.
Version: A 7-19
Figure 7-11 Misconnection of Optical Fibers
7.5.2 Protection and Recovery Function
Protection means replacing a disabled resource with a pre-configured standby

resource. Recovery means replacing a disabled resource with re-routing by virtue of
idle capacity. Generally, the action of protection is completed within scores of
milliseconds, whereas the action of recovery is generally completed in a time range
from hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds.
The SmartWeaver provides protection and recovery for services at the optical layer
and electrical layer respectively. Meanwhile, it supports nesting of optical layer
protection and electrical layer protection. See Table 7-3 for the types of protection
and recovery at the optical layer or electrical layer.
Table 7-3 Protection and Recovery Functions of the ASON
Protection Type Recovery Description

Type
The OCh services always have two

OCP 1+1 trail Permanent 1
LSPs (an active LSP and a standby
protection +1
Optical LSP) until there is no resource available.
layer (OCh When the LSP currently used by the
layer) OCh service fails, the SmartWeaver will
Dynamic re-routing Recovery
work out a new LSP for the services until
there is no resource available.
Electrical
The ODUk services always have two
layer Permanent 1
1+1 trail protection LSPs (an active LSP and a standby
(ODUk +1
LSP) until there is no resource available.
layer)
7-20 Version: A
7 About ASON
Table 7-3 Protection and Recovery Functions of the ASON (Continued)
Protection Type Recovery Description

Type
When the active LSP for the ODUk

services fails, the standby LSP will be
Recovery activated. When the protection LSP fails,
the services will be recovered via
rerouting.
Traditional ODUk 1+1 protection. The

local end is responsible for dual-feeding
SNCP 1+1
– of ODUk signals, whereas the opposite
protection
end is responsible for selective receiving
of ODUk signals with better quality.
When the LSP currently used by the

ODUk service fails, the SmartWeaver
Dynamic re-routing Recovery
will work out a new LSP for the services
until there is no resource available.
The ODUk Ring protection with the
recovery function. Only two ODUk
channels are needed in the ring to
implement protection of distributed
Enhanced
Recovery services between nodes. When the two
protection
protection routes defined by the
transport plane both fail, the services will
be recovered via the function of re-
routing of the control plane.
7.5.3 Differentiated Services
To meet different customer demands for the service security levels, the ASON
provides differentiated services, which can be classified into different levels from the
perspective of service protection and recovery, as shown in Table 7-4.
Version: A 7-21
Table 7-4 Differentiated Service Functions
Service Level Service Protection and Protection and Number of

Note
Quality Recovery Mode Recovery Time Protection
1
Times
Permanent 1+1
Platinum Highest ＜50ms Multiple times
protection
Combination of 1
Protection < 50ms
Gold High +1 protection and Multiple times
Note 2
Recovery < 2s
recovery
Silver Medium 1+1 protection ＜50ms One time

Copper Low Dynamic recovery ＜2s Multiple times
Iron Lowest No protection None None

Note 1: The protection and recovery time in the table indicates the protection and recovery time
in the electrical layer environment with lower traffic. The optical layer protection and
recovery time is associated with the amount of traffic, and generally is shorter than 10s.
Note 2: In the optical layer environment, the combination of 1+1 protection and recovery mode
is not recommended in actual engineering configuration.
7.5.4 End-to-End Service Configuration Function
The following describes the ASON end-to-end service configuration of the FONST
Service Set-up
Besides the traditional OTN and SDH static services, the ASON also supports the
end-to-end intelligent services. When configuring intelligent services, users only
need to know the information about the source node, sink node, bandwidth needed,
and protection level. The network will automatically choose routes and create cross-
connection between nodes.
Service routes can also be restrained by setting compulsory (or repulsive) nodes
and links. Compared with the end-to-end configuration of the traditional OTN and
SDH, this service configuration method fully uses the routing and signaling functions
of each intelligent NE, and ensures security and reliability of the service
configuration.
7-22 Version: A
7 About ASON
Strict Route Configuration
The SmartWeaver provides the strict route configuration function. Strict route, or
static route, is a very special route which designates every detail of the route,
including all nodes, links and timeslots without route calculation. In strict route
configuration, all nodes and links of the LSP must be designated. As the route
calculation is not involved, all route information is obtained manually.
Configuration with Repulsive Resources
During service setup, several best routes may exist under the restriction of a single
routing policy. To further select the best route among them, the user can configure
the routes to include / exclude certain resources, such as NEs, links and link
interfaces.
7.5.5 Network Management Function
Besides the common fault, performance, security, and configuration management,

the system further provides the resource management function. In addition, the
system provides link resources, port resources, PC resources, and SPC resources
statistics reports, helping users to learn the resource usage, and properly analyze,
plan, and use the resources.
7.5.6 Network Maintenance Optimization Function
The SmartWeaver provides the following network maintenance optimization

functions:
Returning to the Original Route
After several topology changes, protections and recoveries of intelligent services,

the current service route may no longer be the original one. By configuring the
revertive property of the services, the SmartWeaver can restore the services to their
original route.
Version: A 7-23
Generally, a route selected for the intelligent services when they are established is
the original route for the intelligent services. After the re-routing of intelligent
services, when the fault on the original route is removed, the services set to
"revertive" will be switched back to their original route.
Presetting Route
To optimize network configuration and make the re-routing as designed by users

when the service path fails, i.e. to enhance the controllability of the service re-
routing, the SmartWeaver provides preset route function. That is, it restores
services on the preset path preferentially when the intelligent services perform re-
routing.
Soft Re-routing
For the purpose of network maintenance or optimization, this system supports the
network re-routing activated by users without implementing on-site function
verification of re-routing services.
Network Traffic Balancing
The ASON distributes traffic flow to different routes as much as possible.
The ASON works out the best route using the CSPF algorithm. However, when
many LSPs exist between two nodes, several LSPs may pass the same route. The
SmartWeaver avoids this situation via the traffic balancing strategy.
As shown in Figure 7-12, several silver services exist between R4 and R3. If the
route strategy applied to all services is "load balancing", the intelligent software will
distribute services to different routes as much as possible, like F-A-B-C, F-E-D-C
and F-A-D-C, to enhance the network security and reliability.
7-24 Version: A
7 About ASON
Figure 7-12 Network Traffic Balancing
Version: A 7-25
8 Management and Maintenance
The FONST 5000 U series of products are used as the packet optical transport
equipment in the inter-province backbone and WAN, fully considering the
equipment management and maintenance requirements of the user in terms of
structure design and function setting, and providing equipment management and
maintenance capabilities.
Monitoring and Management Module
Communication and Maintenance Interfaces
Optical Supervisory Channel Management
Electrical Supervisory Channel Management
Alarm and Performance Event Management
Network Performance Monitoring
Safety Management
TCM
Version: A 8-1
8.1 Monitoring and Management Module
The FONST 5000 U series of products adopt the modular and hierarchical
management design for monitoring and management.
From the bottom up, the monitoring and management modules include the card
management (BMU) module, the element management (EMU) module, and the
EMS module, as shown in Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-1 Monitoring and Management Module
8-2 Version: A
u The BMU is embedded in each card to collect information such as the card
status, alarm events and performance data. The BMU transforms, processes
and saves the collected information, and then sends the saved information to
the EMU.
u The EMU is embedded in each NE management card to collect the BMU

information of each card. The EMU sends the collected information to the
network management system module and transmits the control and
management information from the network management system module to
other BMUs, to achieve the communication between the EMU and the BMU,
between the EMU and another EMU, and between the EMU and the network
management system.
u The network management system module is classified into the EMS (OTNM2000)
and the NMS (OTNM2100). The OTNM2000 exchanges information with the
EMU, provides the GUI, and performs configuration management, alarm
management, performance management, and security management on the
equipment in the entire network; the NMS exchanges information with other
EMSs including the OTNM2000 and achieves uniform information between
different NMS versions, equipment types, and equipment vendors, thereby
facilitating unified network management.
8.2 Communication and Maintenance Interfaces
The communication and maintenance interfaces of FONST 5000 U series of

products are provided by the NE management cards, the AIF cards, and the optical
supervisory channel cards. Table 8-1 lists the management and maintenance
interfaces provided by each card.
Table 8-1 List of Management and Maintenance Interfaces
Card Interface Purpose
External clock input and output

CLK
interface
NE
TOD Reserved interface
manage-
CCU External monitoring ON/OFF
ment
event input interface, generally
card MON
connected to the equipment to
be monitored
Version: A 8-3
Table 8-1 List of Management and Maintenance Interfaces (Continued)
External control ON/OFF event

output interface, generally
CTR connected to the external
environment monitoring
equipment
ALM Subrack alarm output interface
Local monitoring interface,

generally connected with the
f
serial port of a computer where
the LCT software is installed
Network management interface,
F generally connected with a
network management computer
SIG Reserved interface

Intra-NE communication
COM extension interface and
software debugging interface

ETH3/ETH4 generally connected with a
network management computer
EMU/FCU/EFCU Intra-NE communication

TEST Reserved interface

CKIO
interface
External time input and output
TOD interface, which can be used to
access 1PPS+TOD signals

AIF card (FONST 5000
Terminal
U60/U60 2.0)
network management host
board
SIG Control plane interface
ALM Alarm output interface
AIF card (COTP) ALM Alarm output interface
8-4 Version: A
f Local monitoring interface
External control ON/OFF event

output interface, generally
CTR connected to the external
environment monitoring
equipment
External monitoring ON/OFF

event input interface, generally
MON
connected to the equipment to
be monitored

ETH Control plane input interface

F1/F2/F3 generally connected with a
SIG1/SIG2 Control plane interface
COM1/-
extension interface and
COM2/COM3

CLK
interface
AIF1/AIF2 (FONST 5000 U40) TOD interface, which can be used to
ALM1/ALM2 Alarm output interface
Output interface of the alarm

indicator on the top of the rack,
AOR
generally connected to the top
alarm indicator
Alarm output interface on the
head of row cabinet, generally
AOC
connected to alarm interface of
the head of row cabinet
Version: A 8-5

interface, which can be used to
CLK
input or output 1PPS+TOD
signals

SIG Control plane interface

TOD interface, which can be used to
AIF1/AIF2 (FONST 5000
U30/U20) Subrack alarm cascade
interface, which is used to
ALM1/ALM2
connect and converge alarms
of other subracks
Output interface of the alarm
indicator on the top of the rack,
AOR
generally connected to the top
alarm indicator
Alarm output interface on the
head of row cabinet, generally
AOC
connected to alarm interface of
the head of row cabinet
W2M Both W2M and E2M can input
or output one E1 signal. W2M
E2M can be used as an input / output
interface of the external clock.
100 Mbit/s electrical interface,
Optical used to connect to the FE

OSC card (FONST 5000 FE1/FE2
supervi- equipment that supports the
U60/U60 2.0
sory PTP clock.
U40/U30/U20/U10 and COTP)
channel Inputs or outputs one 1588 time
TOD
unit signal.
GE interface, used to connect

OUT1/IN1 to the GE optical interface
OUT2/IN2 equipment that supports the
PTP clock.
OSC (COTP)
E2M or output two E1 signals.
8-6 Version: A
Clock interface, used to input or

1PPS&TOD output one 1PPS+TOD clock
signal.

or output one E1 signal. W2M
E2M can be used as an input / output
interface of the external clock.
EOSC (COTP) 100 Mbit/s electrical interface,
FE1/FE2/- used to connect to the FE
FE3/FE4 equipment that supports the
PTP clock.
GE interface, used to connect
OUT1/IN1 to the GE optical interface
OUT2/IN2 equipment that supports the
PTP clock.
8.3 Optical Supervisory Channel Management
The supervisory and management information between stations can be transmitted

over the OSC.
Overview of the Optical Supervisory Channel
The OSC uses the 1510 nm wavelength and the OSC card (optical supervisory
channel card) and OSCAD card (1510/1550 multiplexing and demultiplexing card).
The optical supervisory channel uses the 2B1H code. After encoding, the line signal
rate reaches 25.344 Mbit/s.
Working Mode of the Optical Supervisory Channel
Figure 8-2 shows the signal flow of the supervisory channels of three stations. As
shown in the figure, the supervisory channel signal (blue line) and main optical
channel signal (signal transmitted over the OA) are independent. The supervisory
signals are terminated and regenerated within the station without being amplified.
Version: A 8-7
In the following the communication between the OTM and the OLA is used as an
example to describe the communication process over the optical supervisory
channel.
Figure 8-2 Signal Flow in the OSC for the Chain Network
The supervisory signal flow in the OTM1→OTM2 direction is as follows:
u The OSC card at the OTM1 station receives the overhead data frames sent by
the NE management card and OPM card of the NE. The OSC card
encapsulates the overhead data frames and some overhead data (such as the
E1 data) accessing the card, and multiplexes the data as 25 Mbit/s signals. The
25 Mbit/s signals, after the E / O conversion via the optical transmitting module,
are modulated on the supervisory channel wavelength (1510 nm). The OSCAD
card multiplexes the signals over the supervisory channel and main optical
channel by using the multiplexer and sends the multiplexed signals to the OLA.
u At the OLA station, the splitter on the east OSCAD card splits the optical line
signals into main optical channel signals and supervisory channel optical
signals. The main optical channel signals are amplified by the repeater on the
OA card and sent to the east direction. The supervisory channel optical signals,
after the E / O conversion via the west optical receiving module of the OSC
card, are recovered as supervisory data frames for processing, and then sent to
the NE management card and OPM card for data exchange. The processed
supervisory signals, after E / O conversion via the east transmitting module of
the OSC card, are finally multiplexed by the east OSCAD card with the main
optical signals and are sent to the line for transmission.
8-8 Version: A
u At the OTM2 station, the multiplexer on the OSCAD card multiplexes the input
optical line signals into the main channel signals and supervisory channel
optical signals. After E / O conversion via the optical receiving module of the
OSC card, the supervisory channel optical signals are recovered as
supervisory data frames for processing, and then sent to the NE management
card and OPM card on the NE for data exchange.
The signal flow of the optical supervisory channel in the OTM2→OTM1 direction is
the same as that in the OTM1→OTM2 direction.
8.4 Electrical Supervisory Channel Management
The supervisory and management information of each station can be transmitted

over the OSC and also over the ESC. Using the ESC can save equipment
investment of the OSC and avoid insertion loss caused by the OSCAD card.
Overview of Electrical Supervisory Channel
The electrical supervisory channel uses the MCC0/1/2 bytes in the frame header of
the tributary and line cards to transmit the supervisory information. This product
uses the MCC0 to transmit the EMS supervisory information and uses the MCC1 or
MCC2 to transmit the inter-control plane information. The supervisory channel
bandwidth is associated with the line rate (OTU rate level).
Working Mode of the Electrical Supervisory Channel
Figure 8-3 shows the signal flow of the supervisory channels of two stations. As
shown in the figure, all the tributary and line cards supporting the ESC on the TX
end receive the supervisory information sent by the NE management cards and the
OPM cards, and then they send the information to the opposite end station. The NE
management cards and the OPM cards on the RX end automatically select and
receive the supervisory information output from a tributary or line card according to
the actual situation. If the route fails, the data will be automatically switched to
another route for receiving.
In the following the communication between two OTMs is used as an example to

describe the communication process over the electrical supervisory channel.
Version: A 8-9
Figure 8-3 Signal Flow in the ESC for the Chain Network
The supervisory signal flow in the OTM1→OTM2 direction is as follows:
u The NE management cards and the OPM cards at the OTM1 station insert the
respective supervisory information to the OTN overhead processing units of the
tributary and line cards and send the overhead to the line side after processing
it.
u At the OTM2 station, the tributary and line cards extract the overhead from the
line side and send the overhead to the NE management cards and the OPM
cards.
The supervisory channel signal flow in the OTM2→OTM1 direction is the same as
that in the OTM1→OTM2 direction.
8.5 Alarm and Performance Event Management
In the daily management and maintenance, users learn the current operating status
via the alarm information and performance statistics, so as to find silent failures in a
timely manner and monitor the equipment in real time.
The alarm and performance information is reported by the BMU to the EMU card,
and then reported to the OTNM2000 by the EMU card. Users can obtain information
about the alarms and performance events conveniently by observing the alarm
indicators on cards and querying on the OTNM2000.
8-10 Version: A
Alarm Management Function
The system supports the alarm management functions, including setting and
querying alarm levels, querying and confirming current alarms, querying and saving
the alarm history, etc. These functions enable users to monitor and maintain the
system operating status instantly.
Performance Monitoring Function
Performance events are important references to reflect the working performance of

the equipment. Performance events and alarms are correlated. When the value of a
certain performance exceeds the preset threshold, the related alarms will be
triggered. When a certain performance event occurs, check whether related alarms
appear, and handle the corresponding performance events according to the
handling methods of related alarms.
System Items to Be Monitored
u Operating temperature of a card
u Present status of a card
u Input / output optical power of an optical module
u Input / output optical power of the optical amplification card, VOA state, and
VOA attenuation value
u Temperature of the amplifier laser
u Temperature of the transmitting laser
u Laser current of an amplifier
u Error code count of the tributary interface card and the line interface card
u Packet count of the tributary interface card and the line interface card (total
number of transmitted / received packets, number of error transmitted and
received packets, and number of lost transmitted and received packets)
u Blocking status and single-wavelength attenuation value of the WSS card
u Protection switching status at the optical layer and the electrical layer
Version: A 8-11
8.6 Network Performance Monitoring
The following describes the performance monitoring capability of the FONST 5000
U series of products on the WDM side and the client side.
Service Performance Monitoring on the Client Side
The FONST 5000 U series of products provide 15-minute and 24-hour performance
monitoring functions based on the access services, as shown in Table 8-2.
Table 8-2 Service Performance Monitoring on the Client Side
Monitorable Performance
Service Service
Item
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-
64/STM-256
SDH/SONET B1 error
OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-
192/OC-768
SM-BIP8 error
OTU1/OTU2/OTU2e/OTU3/O-
OTN TCM-BIP8 error
TU4
PM-BIP8 error
FE, GE, 10GE LAN, 10GE
Ethernet services
WAN, 40GE, and 100GE
ESCON
Statistics of various packets
FICON
SAN services received and transmitted
FC100/FC200/FC400/FC800/-
FC1200
DVB
Video and other services
HDTV
Signal Performance Monitoring on the WDM Side
The FONST 5000 U series of products support the monitoring on the optical power
on the WDM and client sides, monitoring on the optical power of the single
wavelength signal and multiplexed signals, and monitoring on the laser bias current.
The FONST 5000 U series of products provide the network-based performance

monitoring, as shown in Table 8-3.
8-12 Version: A
Table 8-3 Signal Performance Monitoring on the WDM Side
Monitoring Category Monitorable Performance Card

Item
The optical amplification unit,
Performance monitoring optical protection unit, and optical
of OTS / OMS optical Optical power multiplexing and demultiplexing
signals unit provide the real-time detection
function.
Optical protection unit and optical
multiplexing and demultiplexing
unit. The optical protection unit can
Online spectrum Optical power, OSNR, and provide the MON optical interface,
analysis of OTS / OMS wavelength value of each through which the optical spectrum
signals wavelength signal analysis unit can be accessed to
monitor the spectrum of the main
channel without interrupting
services.
Input / output optical power, The optical interfaces of all line
Performance monitoring
laser temperature, and bias cards on the WDM side provide the
of OCh optical signals
current real-time detection function.
SM-BIP8 error The tributary line unit using the
Detection of signals at
TCM-BIP8 error OTN interface provides the real
the OTN electrical layer
PM-BIP8 error time detection function.
Corresponding power monitoring points are set on the equipment. The MON
interfaces on certain card panels provide the optical power online monitoring
function. Cards equipped with MON interfaces are listed as follows:
u Optical amplification unit: OA, PA, and PIC cards
u Multiplexing and demultiplexing unit: OSCAD
8.7 Safety Management
The following describes operation safety management of the FONST 5000 U series
of products and the EMS.
Version: A 8-13
Equipment Operation Safety
u Obvious signs for safe operations are located on the subrack, cards, and fan
unit of the equipment, including the subrack earth grounding sign, the ESD
protection sign, the card optical interface level sign, the sign for safe operations
of the fan unit, etc.
u The equipment structure design meets the requirements specified in ETSI 300
019 Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications
equipment.
EMS Operation Safety
u The access control covers the user login management, division of management
domains, control of access time, and management of remote access. The
purpose is to prevent illegal users from accessing the network resources
(including the OTNM2000) or authorized users from accessing a network
domain beyond their authorization.
u To define legal users and prevent operations beyond authority, the system
divides the users into different authority levels. The users are divided into four
levels. Each level has the corresponding management authority. For each user,
only the management right of his / her own level is authorized. The higher-level
users have all the rights that the lower-level users have.
u The system supports the log management: The login operations and other key
operations of users are recorded in the log automatically.
8.8 TCM
The following introduces the TCM of the FONST 5000 U series of products.
TCM Structure
The TCM is the overhead based on the OTUk layer. Each TCM overhead occupies
three bytes and provides six-level serial connection supervision function. Multi-
carrier, multi-equipment vendor, and multi-subnet environments can be managed in
a hierarchical and segmental manner by properly planning and configuring the TCMi
(i=1 to 6) of the OTUk layer.
Figure 8-4 shows the position of the TCM overheads in the OTN frame structure.
8-14 Version: A
Figure 8-4 The OTU Frame Structure
TCM Application
The following describes the TCM supervision. Figure 8-5 shows the channel
supervision across multiple carrier networks by using the TCM overhead.
According to the ITU-G G.709, up to six TCM levels are supported. In this example,
3-level TCM overhead is used to supervise different networks.
Figure 8-5 TCM Function
u The client uses TCM1 to supervise the QoS of the optical UNI-UNI.
u The operator uses the TCM2 to supervise the QoS of the carrier network.
u Operator A and operator B use the TCM3 to supervise the intra-domain and
inter-domain network connections.
Version: A 8-15
Once a failure occurs, the fault location can be identified through the TCM1, TCM2,
and TCM3 status.
For details about the TCM overhead configuration, see Flexible OTN Overhead
Configuration.
8-16 Version: A
9 Technical Specification
The following introduces the technical specifications of the FONST 5000 U series of
products.
Frequency and Wavelength
Specifications of Tributary Interface Cards
Specifications of Line Interface Cards
Specifications of Cross-Connect Cards
Specifications of PIC Cards
Specifications of the Optical Transponder Cards
Specifications of Optical Layer Cards
Specifications of System Connection and Management Cards
DCM Specifications
Power Consumption of Cards
Mechanical Dimensions
Version: A 9-1
9.1 Frequency and Wavelength
The FONST 5000 U series of products support hybrid transmission of the following
signals.
u 48-channel × 10Gbit/s, 48-channel × 40Gbit/s, and 48-channel × 100Gbit/s
u 96-channel × 10Gbit/s, 96-channel × 40Gbit/s, and 96-channel × 100Gbit/s
u The 96-channel below systems support 10Gbit/s, 40Gbit/s, and 100Gbit/s

signals.
Different channels of the FONST 5000 U series of products use different bands.
u 48-channel system: The channel spacing is 100 GHz. The 48 channels in the
CE band are usually used.
u 96-channel system: The channel spacing is 50 GHz. The 96 channels (48

channels in the CO and 48 channels in the CE bands respectively) are usually
used. Using the channel interleaved technology, the channel spacing can be
converted from 100 GHz to 50 GHz.
Table 9-1 lists the frequencies and wavelengths at the CO and CE bands.
Table 9-1 Frequencies and Wavelengths at the CO and CE Bands
CE CO
No f (THz) λ (nm) No f (THz) λ (nm)
1 196.000 1529.55 1 196.050 1529.16

2 195.900 1530.33 2 195.950 1529.94
3 195.800 1531.12 3 195.850 1530.72
4 195.700 1531.90 4 195.750 1531.51
5 195.600 1532.68 5 195.650 1532.29
6 195.500 1533.47 6 195.550 1533.07
7 195.400 1534.25 7 195.450 1533.86
8 195.300 1535.04 8 195.350 1534.64
9 195.200 1535.82 9 195.250 1535.43
10 195.100 1536.61 10 195.150 1536.22
11 195.000 1537.40 11 195.050 1537.00
12 194.900 1538.19 12 194.950 1537.79
13 194.800 1538.98 13 194.850 1538.58
14 194.700 1539.77 14 194.750 1539.37
15 194.600 1540.56 15 194.650 1540.16
9-2 Version: A
Table 9-1 Frequencies and Wavelengths at the CO and CE Bands (Continued)
CE CO
No f (THz) λ (nm) No f (THz) λ (nm)
16 194.500 1541.35 16 194.550 1540.95

17 194.400 1542.14 17 194.450 1541.75
18 194.300 1542.94 18 194.350 1542.54
19 194.200 1543.73 19 194.250 1543.33
20 194.100 1544.53 20 194.150 1544.13
21 194.000 1545.32 21 194.050 1544.92
22 193.900 1546.12 22 193.950 1545.72
23 193.800 1546.92 23 193.850 1546.52
24 193.700 1547.72 24 193.750 1547.32
25 193.600 1548.51 25 193.650 1548.11
26 193.500 1549.32 26 193.550 1548.91
27 193.400 1550.12 27 193.450 1549.72
28 193.300 1550.92 28 193.350 1550.52
29 193.200 1551.72 29 193.250 1551.32
30 193.100 1552.52 30 193.150 1552.12
31 193.000 1553.33 31 193.050 1552.93
32 192.900 1554.13 32 192.950 1553.73
33 192.800 1554.94 33 192.850 1554.54
34 192.700 1555.75 34 192.750 1555.34
35 192.600 1556.55 35 192.650 1556.15
36 192.500 1557.36 36 192.550 1556.96
37 192.400 1558.17 37 192.450 1557.77
38 192.300 1558.98 38 192.350 1558.58
39 192.200 1559.79 39 192.250 1559.39
40 192.100 1560.61 40 192.150 1560.20
41 192.000 1561.42 41 192.050 1561.01
42 191.900 1562.23 42 191.950 1561.83
43 191.800 1563.05 43 191.850 1562.64
44 191.700 1563.86 44 191.750 1563.45
45 191.600 1564.68 45 191.650 1564.27
46 191.500 1565.5 46 191.550 1565.09
47 191.400 1566.31 47 191.450 1565.90
48 191.300 1567.13 48 191.350 1566.72
Version: A 9-3
9.2 Specifications of Tributary Interface Cards
The following describes the interface specifications, mechanical specifications and

optical power of the tributary interface cards.
9.2.1 Specifications of the xTN1 Cards
Interface Specifications
Table 9-2 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN1 Cards
Item Unit Specification
155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G

Optical module type – multi-rate SFP multi-rate SFP multi-rate SFP
optical module optical module optical module
Optical line code – NRZ NRZ NRZ

Target distance km 15 40 80
Operating
nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Source type – SLM/DFB SLM/DFB SLM/DFB

Maximum -20dB
nm 1 1 1
width
Tran-
Minimum side
smit-
mode suppression dB 30 30 30
ter at
ratio
refer-
Maximum mean
ence dBm 0 3 3
launched power
point
S Minimum mean
dBm -5 -2 -2
launched power
Minimum
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
extinction ratio
Transmit signal
– Compliant with the G.957 template
eye pattern
Re- Receiver type – PIN APD

cei- Minimum
ver at sensitivity (BER ≤ dBm -18 -27 -28
refer- -12
10 )
ence
Minimum overload
point dBm 0 -9 -9
(BER ≤ 10-12)
R
9-4 Version: A
Table 9-2 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN1 Cards (Continued)
Maximum
reflectance of
receiver, measured dB -27 -27 -27
at reference point
R
Mechanical Parameters
Table 9-3 Mechanical Parameters of the xTN1 Cards
Card Panel Dimension (H × W) (mm)
8TN1 407×30
16TN1 407×30
24TN1 407×30
32TN1 407×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-4 Power Consumption of the xTN1 Cards
Card Maximum Power Consumption (W)
8TN1 72
16TN1 (PMC) 80
16TN1 (microelectronic) 85
24TN1 95
32TN1 110
9.2.2 Specifications of the xTN2 Cards
Table 9-5 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN2 Cards
10 Gbit/s (multiple
Optical module type –
rates)
Target distance km 10
Version: A 9-5
Table 9-5 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN2 Cards (Continued)
Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1330

Maximum -20dB width nm 1.0
Trans- Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30

mitter at Maximum mean launched power dBm -1
refer- Minimum mean launched power dBm -6
ence
Minimum extinction ratio dB 6.5
point S
Compliant with the
Transmit signal eye pattern – ITU-T G.691
template
Receiver type – PIN

Recei-
-12
ver at Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -14
refer- Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -1
ence
Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured
point R dB -14
at reference point R
Table 9-6 Mechanical Parameters of the xTN2 Cards
4TN2 407×30
8TN2 407×30
10TN2 407×30
12TN2 407×30
20TN2 407×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-7 Power Consumption of the xTN2 Cards
4TN2 120
8TN2 123
10TN2 125
12TN2 127
20TN2 145.6
9-6 Version: A
9.2.3 Specifications of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card
Table 9-8 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card
10 Gbit/s
Optical module type –
(multiple rates)
Minimum side mode suppression
dB 30
ratio
Transmitter at Maximum mean launched power dBm -1
reference point S Minimum mean launched power dBm -6
Compliant with
Transmit signal eye pattern – the ITU-T G.691
template
Receiver type – PIN

Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -14
Receiver at
-12
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm 0
reference point R
Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB -27
measured at reference point R
Table 9-9 Mechanical Parameters of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card
10TP2 407×30
20TP2 407×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-10 Power Consumption of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card
10TP2 88
20TP2 100
Version: A 9-7
9.2.4 Specifications of the 1TO3 Card
Table 9-11 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TO3 Card
Optical module type – VSR

Optical line code – NRZ
-20dB spectrum width nm ≤1
Source type – MSA
Minimum side mode
Tran- dB 35
suppression ratio
smit-
Maximum mean launched power
ter at dBm 3
(each lane)
refer-
Minimum mean launched power
ence dBm 0
(each lane)
point
S Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Compliant with the G.693
Transmit signal eye pattern –
template
Re- Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-

12
) dBm -7
cei-
ver Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 3
at Maximum optical path penalty dB 2
refer-
Maximum reflectance of
ence
receiver, measured at reference dB -27
point
point R
R
Table 9-12 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TO3 Card
1TO3 407×30
9-8 Version: A
Power Consumption
Table 9-13 Power Consumption of the 1TO3 Card
1TO3 120
9.2.5 Specifications of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card
Table 9-14 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card
Optical module type – C4S1-2D1

Op- LANE0 nm 1264.5 to 1277.5
erat- LANE1 nm 1284.5 to 1297.5
ing LANE2 nm 1304.5 to 1317.5
wa-
ve-
leng-
LANE3 nm 1324.5 to 1337.5
th
rang-
e
Source type – SMF
Minimum side mode
Tran- dB 30
suppression ratio
smit-
ter at dBm 2.3
(each lane)
refer-
ence dBm -7
(each lane)
point
Compliant with the ITU-T G.959.
1 template
Version: A 9-9
Table 9-14 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card (Continued)

12
) dBm -11.5
cei-
refer-
ence
point
point R
R
Table 9-15 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card
1TN3 407×30
2TN3 407×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-16 Power Consumption of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card
1TN3 110
2TN3 160
9.2.6 Specifications of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card
Table 9-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card
Optical module type – C4S1-2D1

9-10 Version: A
Table 9-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card (Continued)
Op- LANE0 nm 1264.5 to 1277.5

erat- LANE1 nm 1284.5 to 1297.5
ing LANE2 nm 1304.5 to 1317.5
wa-
ve-
leng-
LANE3 nm 1324.5 to 1337.5
th
rang-
e
Source type – SMF
Minimum side mode
Tran- dB 30
suppression ratio
smit-
ter at dBm 2.3
(each lane)
refer-
ence dBm -7
(each lane)
point
Compliant with the G.959.1
template

12
) dBm -11.5
cei-
refer-
ence
point
point R
R
Table 9-18 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card
1TN4 407×30
2TN4 407×30
Version: A 9-11
Power Consumption
Table 9-19 Power Consumption of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card
1TN4 120
2TN4 177
9.3 Specifications of Line Interface Cards
The following describes the interface specifications, mechanical specifications and

power consumption of the line interface cards.
9.3.1 Specifications of the xLN2 Cards
Table 9-20 Optical Interface Specifications of the xLN2 Cards
Source type and modulation type – DFB/MZ

800 (wavelength
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm
untunable module)

dB 30
ratio
Maximum mean launched power dBm 2
Transmitter at
Minimum mean launched power dBm -3
reference point S
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 (Filter off)
Compliant with the

Transmit signal eye pattern – ITU-T G.691
template
Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -17 (PIN)
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 (PIN)

Receiver at
Maximum optical path penalty dB 2
reference point R
dB -27
measured at reference point R
9-12 Version: A
Table 9-21 Mechanical Parameters of the xLN2 Cards
4LN2 407×30
12LN2 407×30
20LN2 407×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-22 Power Consumption of the xLN2 Cards
4LN2 130
12LN2 140
20LN2 160
9.3.2 Specifications of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card
Table 9-23 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card on the WDM Side
Channel spacing GHz 50

Optical line code – Coherent PM-QPSK
Transmission rate Gbit/s 127.156
Nominal central frequency
THz 191.3 to 196.05
range
Maximum central frequency

Tran- GHz ±2.5
deviation
smit-
Maximum -20dB spectrum
ter at nm 0.5
width
refer-
Minimum side mode
ence dB 35
suppression ratio
point
Maximum mean launched
S dBm 5
power
Minimum mean launched

dBm -5
power
Version: A 9-13
Table 9-23 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card on the WDM Side
(Continued)
Minimum sensitivity of the

dBm ≤ -18
receiver
Re- Minimum overload of the

dBm ≥0
cei- receiver
ver at Maximum reflectance of the

dB ≤ -27
refer- receiver
ence Receiving range of the
nm 1529.16 to 1567.14
point receiver Note 1
R Dispersion tolerance ps/nm ±55000
Differential group delay
ps 105 (0.5dB OSNR cost)
tolerance value
Note 1: Receivable wavelength range for the receiver. The receiver is required to work within
the range that corresponds to the transmitted wavelength.
Table 9-24 Mechanical Parameters of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card
1LN4 (single-slot) 407×30

1LN4 (double-slot) 407×60
2LN4 407×60
Power Consumption
Table 9-25 Power Consumption of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card
1LN4 (single-slot) 185

1LN4 (double-slot) 185
2LN4 300
9.4 Specifications of Cross-Connect Cards
The following describes the specifications of the cross-connect cards of the FONST
9-14 Version: A
Table 9-26 Mechanical Parameters of the Cross-connect Cards
UXU2 (U60/U60 2.0) 352×55

UXU2 (U40/U30/U20/U10) 352×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-27 Power Consumption of the Cross-connect Cards
UXU2 120
9.5 Specifications of PIC Cards
The following describes the PIC card specifications of the FONST 5000 U series of
products.
9.5.1 Specifications of the 10IL2 Card
Table 9-28 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10IL2 Card
Item Unit PIN Module Specification APD Module Specification
Rate Gb/s 9.953 to 11.3 9.953 to 11.3

Maximum
-20dB spectrum nm 0.3 0.4
width
Minimum side
mode
dB 35 30
suppression
ratio
Transmit power dBm -5 to 1 -1 to 2
Optical power
of the dBm 5 to 11 8 to 11
multiplexer
Version: A 9-15
Table 9-28 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10IL2 Card (Continued)
Maximum
output power of dBm 0.5 0.5
a wavelength
Maximum
output power dB 1.5 2
error
Transmit signal
― Fit G.959.1 mode Fit G.959.1 mode
eye pattern
Acceptable
nm Band1 to Band8 Band1 to Band8
receive range
Channel
GHz 100 100
spacing
Maximum
central
nm -0.05 to +0.05 -0.05 to +0.05
frequency
deviation
Minimum
sensitivity of
the single- dBm -13 -24
channel
receiver
Minimum
sensitivity of
dBm -3 -11
the all-channel
receiver
Minimum
overload of the
dBm 2 -9
single-channel
receiver
Minimum
overload of the
dBm 12 1
all-channel
receiver
Maximum
reflectance of dB -27 -27
the receiver
Maximum
transmission dB 3 3
loss
9-16 Version: A
Table 9-28 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10IL2 Card (Continued)
Minimum
optical signal- dB 12 12
to-noise ratio
Receiver type – PIN APD
Table 9-29 Mechanical Parameters of the 10IL2 Card
10IL2 407×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-30 Power Consumption of the 10IL2 Card
10IL2 130
9.5.2 Specifications of the BMD2 Card
Specifications of the BMD2 Card
Table 9-31 Specifications of the BMD2 Card
OSC 1510 wavelength range nm 1510 to 1520

DWDM channel spacing GHz 100
DWDM channel bandwidth nm λ±0.11
Band 2: 1537.4 to 1544.53
Bandwidth range nm
Band 3: 1546.12 to 1553.33
OSC 1550 channel: ≤ 0.8
Insertion loss dB
Multiplexing and
demultiplexing: ≤ 1.4
Version: A 9-17
Table 9-31 Specifications of the BMD2 Card (Continued)
Adjacent channel isolation of

multiplexing and
Isolation dB demultiplexing: ≥ 15
OSC 1550 channel: ≥ 15
Temperature-related loss dB ≤ 0.005
Return loss dB ≥ 45
Direction dB ≥ 50
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.15
PMD Ps ≤ 0.15
Table 9-32 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2 Card
Card Panel Dimensions (H × W) (mm)
BMD2 407×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-33 Power Consumption of the BMD2 Card
BMD2 20
9.5.3 Specifications of the BMD2P Card
Specifications of the BMD2P Card
Table 9-34 Specifications of the BMD2P Card

Band 2: 1537.4 to 1544.53
Bandwidth range nm
Band 3: 1546.12 to 1553.33
9-18 Version: A
Table 9-34 Specifications of the BMD2P Card (Continued)

Insertion loss dB
Multiplexing and

multiplexing and
Direction dB ≥ 50
PMD Ps ≤ 0.15
Specifications of the BMD2P Card's Amplifier
Table 9-35 Specifications of the BMD2P Card's Amplifier
Gain flatness dB ≤ 1.5

Output power (APR) dB -1
Output power with no input
dB -16 to -12
power
Error range of nominal gain dB ±0.5

Error range of saturated
dB ±0.5
output optical power
Split ratio of the output power

% 1
monitoring interface
VOA attenuation range dB 0 to 25
Table 9-36 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2P Card
BMD2P 407×30
Version: A 9-19
Power Consumption
Table 9-37 Power Consumption of the BMD2P Card
BMD2P 28
9.5.4 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card
Specifications of the BMD2PP Card
Table 9-38 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card

Band 2: 1537.4 to 1544.53
Bandwidth range nm
Band 3: 1546.12 to 1553.33
Insertion loss dB
Multiplexing and

multiplexing and
Direction dB ≥ 50
PMD Ps ≤ 0.15
Specifications of the BMD2PP Card's Amplifier
Table 9-39 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card's Amplifier
Gain flatness dB ≤ 1.5

Output power (APR) dB -1
9-20 Version: A
Table 9-39 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card's Amplifier (Continued)
Output power with no input

dB -16 to -12
power
Error range of nominal gain dB ±0.5

Error range of saturated
dB ±0.5
output optical power
Split ratio of the output power

% 1
monitoring interface
VOA attenuation range dB 0 to 25
Table 9-40 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2PP Card
BMD2PP 407×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-41 Power Consumption of the BMD2PP Card
BMD2PP 36
9.6 Specifications of the Optical Transponder

Cards
The following introduces the interface specifications, mechanical parameters, and

power consumption of the optical transponder cards.
Version: A 9-21
9.6.1 Specifications of the MST2 Card
Table 9-42 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the STM-16 / OTU1
Service)
155M-2.
155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G
67G multi-
multi-rate multi-rate
Optical module type - rate SFP
SFP optical SFP optical
optical
module module
module
Optical line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ
1260 to 1280 to 1500 to
Operating wavelength range nm
1335 1335 1580
Source type - SLM/DFB SLM/DFB SLM/DFB
Maximum -20 dB width nm 1 1 1
Transmitter at Minimum side mode suppression
dB 30 30 30
reference point S ratio
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 3 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm -5 -2 -2
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
Transmit signal eye pattern - ITU-T G.957 mask compliant
Receiver type - PIN APD

Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -18 -27 -28
Receiver at
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 -9 -9
reference point R
dB -27 -27 -27
measured at R
Table 9-43 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the GE Service)
1000BA- 1000B- 1000BA- 1000BA-

Optical module type -
SE-SX ASE-LX SE-EX SE-ZX
Optical line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 0.55 10 40 80
770 to 1270 to 1275 to 1500 to
Transmitter at Operating wavelength range nm
860 1355 1350 1580
reference point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 -3 0 5
9-22 Version: A
Table 9-43 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the GE Service)
(Continued)
Minimum mean launched power dBm -9.5 -8 -5 0

Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 9 9 9
Transmit signal eye pattern - IEEE 802.3 mask compliant
-12
Receiver at Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -17 -20 -23 -23
reference point R Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 -3 -3 -3
Table 9-44 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the MST2 Card
Source type and modulation mode - DFB/MZ

Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800
Maximum -20 dB width nm 0.3
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
Transmitter at reference
point S
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10
ITU-T G.691 mask
Transmit signal eye pattern -
compliant

Receiver at reference Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 (PIN)
point R Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured
dB -27
at R
Table 9-45 Mechanical Parameters of the MST2 Card
Card Panel Dimension (Height × Width) (mm) Net Weight (kg)
MST2 368 × 30 1.13
Power Consumption
Table 9-46 Power Consumption of the MST2 Card
MST2 40
Version: A 9-23
9.6.2 Specifications of the OTU2S Card
Table 9-47 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the OTU2S Card
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s

Optical module type - (multiple (multiple (multiple
rates) rates) rates)
1290 to 1530 to 1530 to
1330 1565 1565
Maximum -20 dB width nm 1.0 0.4 0.4
Transmitter at dB 30 - -
ratio
reference point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm -1 2 4
Minimum mean launched power dBm -6 -1 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 6.5 8.2 9

-12
Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -14 -17 -24
Receiver at
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 0 -7
reference point R
dB -27 -27 -27
measured at R

point S
ITU-T G.691 mask
compliant
Receiver at reference point Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -17 (PIN)
R Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 (PIN)
9-24 Version: A
Table 9-48 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2S Card (Continued)

dB -27
measured at R
Table 9-49 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2S Card
OTU2S 368 × 30 1.0

OTU2S (XFP) 368 × 30 1.03
Power Consumption
Table 9-50 Power Consumption of the OTU2S Card
OTU2S 25
OTU2S (XFP) 16
9.6.3 Specification of the 2OTU2S Card
Table 9-51 Specifications of Wavelength Division Side Optical Interfaces on the 2OTU2S Card

1290 to 1530 to 1530 to
1330 1565 1565
Maximum -20dB width nm 1.0 0.4 0.4
Transmitter at Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30 - -
reference point S Maximum mean launched power dBm -1 2 4

Version: A 9-25
(Continued)
Receiver type – PIN APD

Receiver at
-12
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm 0 0 -7
reference point R
dB -27 -27 -27
measured at R
Source type and modulation mode – DFB/MZ

point S
ITU-T G.691 mask
compliant

Receiver at reference -12
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm 0 (PIN)
point R Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB -27
measured at R
Table 9-53 Mechanical Parameters of the 2OTU2S Card
2OTU2S 368×30 1.03
Power Consumption
Table 9-54 Power Consumption of the 2OTU2S Card
2OTU2S 36
9-26 Version: A
9.6.4 Specifications of the OTU2E Card
155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G

Optical module type - multi-rate SFP multi-rate SFP multi-rate SFP
optical module optical module optical module
Optical line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ

Operating wavelength range nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Source type - SLM/DFB SLM/DFB SLM/DFB
Maximum -20 dB width nm 1 1 1
Minimum side mode
dB 30 30 30
suppression ratio
Transmitter at
Maximum mean launched
reference point S dBm 0 3 3
power
Minimum mean launched

dBm -5 -2 -2
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2 8.2


Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤
dBm -18 -27 -28
10-12)
Receiver at
Minimum overload (BER ≤
reference point R dBm 0 -9 -9
10-12)
dB -27 -27 -27
receiver, measured at R

Transmitter at Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35

reference point S Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Version: A 9-27
Table 9-56 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2E Card (Continued)

ITU-T G.691 mask
compliant

Receiver at reference -12
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm 0 (PIN)
point R Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at
dB -27
R
Table 9-57 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2E Card
OTU2E 368 × 30 1.2
Power Consumption
Table 9-58 Power Consumption of the OTU2E Card
OTU2E 33
9.6.5 Specification of the OTU2F Card
Table 9-59 Specifications of Wavelength Division Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2F Card
Source type and modulation mode – DFB/MZ

point S
ITU-T G.691 mask
compliant
9-28 Version: A
(Continued)

-12
Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -17 (PIN)
Receiver at reference Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 (PIN)
point R Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at
dB -27
R
Table 9-60 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2F Card
OTU2F 368 × 30 1.5
Power Consumption
Table 9-61 Power Consumption of the OTU2F Card
OTU2F 29
Optical line code - NRZ

Application code - VRZ2000-3R2
Fiber type - G.652
Maximum -20 dB width nm -
Transmitter at reference point Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35

S Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
-12
Receiver at reference point R Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -6
Version: A 9-29
Table 9-62 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card (Continued)
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 3

Maximum optical path penalty dB 2
dB -27
measured at R
Channel spacing GHz 50 50

Optical line code - sRZ-DQPSK sDPSK
Maximum central frequency deviation GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
Maximum -20 dB width nm NA NA
Transmitter Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35 35

at reference Maximum mean launched power dBm 5 5
point S Minimum mean launched power dBm -10 -5
Transmit signal eye pattern - TBD TBD
Minimum extinction ratio dB NA NA
Note 1
Minimum sensitivity of the receiver dBm -14 -14
Receiver at Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0 0
reference Maximum reflectance of the receiver dB -27 -27
point R 1528 to
Receiving range of the receiver Note 2 nm 1528 to 1568
1568
Note 1: An optical pre-amplifier is integrated in the receiver.
Note 2: The receiver is required to work within the range that corresponds to the transmitted wavelength.
The built-in PA module on the wavelength division side in the receiving direction of
the OTU3S card is a single-wavelength optical amplification module applicable to
the 40G optical transport network. Using the pump laser with TEC (Thermo Electric
Cooling), the module can adjust its output power in the range of 0 to 10 dBm. See
Table 9-64 for specifications of the module.
Table 9-64 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3S Card
Optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568

Input power range dBm -30 to 0
9-30 Version: A
Table 9-64 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3S Card (Continued)
Output optical power range Note 1 dBm 0 to 10

Note 2
Gain dB ≥ 25
NF (noise figure) - 5.5 / 7.5
Threshold for the Rx-LOS alarm dBm -25 to -24
Threshold for the Tx-LOS alarm dBm -3 to -2
Input optical power threshold at pump OFF dBm -25 to -24
Note 1: The optical output power includes the signal power and the ASE power. Make sure that
the output optical power is 10 dBm when the input power is more than -25 dBm. In the
APC working mode, the optical power can be adjusted within the range via the
parameter setting.
Note 2: For the signal power gain, the larger gain the better. However, make sure that the gain
should be no less than 20 dB.
Table 9-65 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3S Card
Wavelength range nm 1527 to 1565

Mean dispersion accuracy ps/nm ±20
Insertion loss dB 4
OTU3S 368 × 60 3.0 (DPSK) / 3.4 (DQPSK)
Power Consumption
OTU3S 81 (DPSK) / 91 (DQPSK)
Version: A 9-31
9.6.7 Specification of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)
Table 9-68 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card (Coherent)
Optical line code - NRZ

Application code - VRZ2000-3R2
Fiber type - G.652
Maximum -20 dB width nm -
Transmitter at Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35

reference point S Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -6
-12
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm 3
Receiver at reference Maximum optical path penalty dB 2
point R Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 40
dB -27
at point R
Table 9-69 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card (Coherent)

Optical line code - PM-DQPSK
Maximum central frequency deviation GHz ±2.5
Transmitter at
reference point S
Transmit signal eye pattern - TBD
Minimum extinction ratio dB NA
Note 1
Minimum sensitivity of the receiver dBm -15
Receiver at Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0
reference point R Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at
dB -27
point R
9-32 Version: A
Table 9-69 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card (Coherent)
(Continued)

Note 2
Receiving range of the receiver nm 1528 to 1568
Differential group delay tolerance ps 100
Note 2: The receivable wavelength of the receiver should be corresponding to the Tx wavelength.
Table 9-70 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)
Card Panel Dimension (Height×Width) (mm) Net Weight (kg)
OTU3S (Coherent) 368×60 3.2
Power Consumption
Table 9-71 Power Consumption of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)
OTU3S (Coherent) 108

1290 to 1530 to 1530 to
Transmitter at 1330 1565 1565
reference point Maximum -20 dB width nm 1.0 0.4 0.4

S Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30 - -
Version: A 9-33
Table 9-72 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card (Continued)


-12
Receiver at Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -14 -17 -24
reference point Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 0 -7
R
dB -27 -27 -27
measured at R

sRZ-
Optical line code - sDPSK
DQPSK
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35 35
Transmitter at
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5 5
reference point S
Minimum mean launched power dBm -10 -5
Minimum sensitivity of the receiver Note 1 dBm -14 -14
Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0 0
Receiver at
Maximum reflectance of the receiver dB -27 -27
reference point R
1528 to 1528 to
Receiving range of the receiver Note 2 nm
1568 1568
The built-in OPA module on the wavelength division side in the receiving direction of
the OTU3E card is a single-wavelength optical amplification module applicable to
the 40G optical transport network. Using the pump laser with TEC (Thermo Electric
Table 9-74 and Table 9-75 for the parameters.
9-34 Version: A
Table 9-74 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3E Card
Optical wavelength range (48 channels of C-band) nm 1528 to 1568

Note 2
Gain dB ≥ 25
NF (noise figure) dB 5.5 / 7.5
Threshold for the Rx-LOS alarm dBm -25 to -24
parameter setting.
Table 9-75 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3E Card
Wavelength range nm 1527 to 1565

Mean dispersion accuracy ps/nm ±20
Insertion loss dB 4
OTU3E 368 × 60 2.75
Power Consumption
OTU3E 75 (DPSK) / 85 (DQPSK)
Version: A 9-35
9.6.9 Specification of the OTU3E Card (Coherent)
Table 9-78 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card (Coherent)

1290 to 1530 to 1530 to
1330 1565 1565
Transmitter Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30 - -
at reference
point S
Transmit signal eye pattern - ITU-T Rec. G.691 mask compliant
Receiver at Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -14 -17 -24

reference Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 0 -7
point R
Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at
dB -27 -27 -27
point R
Table 9-79 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card (Coherent)

Optical line code - PM-DQPSK
Transmitter at
reference point S
Transmit signal eye pattern - TBD
Minimum extinction ratio dB NA
Note 1
Receiver at Minimum sensitivity of the receiver dBm -20
reference point R Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0
9-36 Version: A
Table 9-79 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card (Coherent)
(Continued)
Maximum reflectance of receiver dB -27

Note 2
Receiving range of the receiver nm 1528 to 1568
Differential group delay tolerance ps 100
Note 2: The receivable wavelength of the receiver should be corresponding to the Tx wavelength.
Table 9-80 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3E Card (Coherent)
Card Panel Dimension (Height×Width) (mm) Net Weight (kg)
OTU3E (Coherent) 368×90 3.5
Power Consumption
Table 9-81 Power Consumption of the OTU3E Card (Coherent)
OTU3E (Coherent) 98
9.6.10 Specification of the OTU3F Card

Optical line code - sRZ-DQPSK sDPSK
Transmitter at Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35 35

reference point S Maximum mean launched power dBm 5 5
Minimum mean launched power dBm -10 -5
Version: A 9-37
(Continued)

Note 1
Minimum sensitivity of the receiver dBm -14 -14
Receiver at Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0 0
reference point R Maximum reflectance of the receiver dB -27 -27
Note 2
Receiving range of the receiver nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
The built-in PA module on the wavelength division side in the Rx direction of the
OTU3E card is a single-wavelength optical amplification module applicable to the
40G optical transport network. Using the pump laser with TEC (Thermo Electric
Table 9-83 for specific specifications.
Table 9-83 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3F Card
Optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568

Gain Note 2 dB ≥25
NF (noise figure) dB 5.5 / 7.5
Threshold for Rx-LOS alarm dBm -25 to -24
parameter setting.
9-38 Version: A
OTU3F (2.018.150) 368×90 3.7

OTU3F (2.200.589) 368×90 3.98
OTU3F (2.200.181) 368×90 4.11
Power Consumption
OTU3F (2.018.150) 88
OTU3F (2.200.589) 93
OTU3F (2.200.181) 98
100G-
4I1-
Optical interface type - 100GBASE-LR4 BASE- 4I1-9C1F
9D1F
ER4
Single-channel signal rate Gbit/s 25.78125 27.95249339
Multiplexed signal rate Gbit/s 103.125 111.8099736
λ1 1294.53 to 1296.59
Transmitter central λ2 1299.02 to 1301.09
nm
Transmitter at wavelength range λ3 1303.54 to 1305.63
reference point S λ4 1308.09 to 1310.19
Single-channel mean -2.5 to -0.6 to +4.
dBm -2.5 to +2.9 -2.7 to +2.9
launched power (OMA) +2.9 5
Version: A 9-39
Table 9-86 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4S Card (Continued)
Single-channel eye
-
pattern
X1 X2 X3 Y1 Y2 Y3
0.25 0.4 0.45 0.25 0.28 0.4
Single-channel eye
dB ≥4 ≥8 ≥4 ≥8
pattern extinction ratio
Single-channel receiver ≤ -21.4

dBm ≤ -8.6 (OMA) ≤ -10.5 ≤ -23.2
Receiver at minimum sensitivity (OMA)
reference point R Single-channel minimum
dBm 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
overload

Optical line code - Coherent PM-QPSK
Nominal central frequency range THz 191.3 to 196.05
Transmitter at Maximum -20 dB width nm 0.5

reference point S Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
Minimum sensitivity of the receiver dBm ≤ -18
Minimum overload of the receiver dBm ≥0
Receiver at
Maximum reflectance of the receiver dB ≤ -27
reference point R
Note 1
Receiving range of the receiver nm 1529.16 to 1567.14
9-40 Version: A
Table 9-87 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4S Card (Continued)
Differential group delay tolerance ps 105 (0.5 dB OSNR cost)
OTU4S 368 × 60 3.25
Power Consumption
OTU4S 160
10 10
Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s Gbit/s
Optical module type - (multi- (multiple (multi-
ple rates) ple
rates) rates)
1290 to 1530 to 1530 to
1330 1565 1565
Transmitter at
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30 - -
reference point S
Version: A 9-41
Table 9-90 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4E Card (Continued)

Receiver at reference
-12
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm 0 0 -7
point R
dB -27 -27 -27
at R

Transmitter at reference Maximum -20 dB width nm 0.5

point S Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
Receiver at reference Maximum reflectance of the receiver dB ≤ -27

Note 1
point R Receiving range of the receiver nm 1529.16 to 1567.14
OTU4E 368 × 60 3.75
9-42 Version: A
Power Consumption
OTU4E 200
9.6.13 Specifications of the OTU4F Card
Table 9-94 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4F Card

Transmitter at reference Maximum -20 dB width nm 0.5

point S Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
Receiver at reference Maximum reflectance of the receiver dB ≤ -27

point R Receiving range of the receiver Note 1 nm 1529.16 to 1567.14
OTU4F 368 × 90 4.5
Version: A 9-43
Power Consumption
OTU4F 250
9.7 Specifications of Optical Layer Cards
The following describes the optical layer card specifications of the FONST 5000 U
series of products.
9.7.1 Specifications of the OMU Series Card
Table 9-97 Specifications of the OMU Series Cards

OMU2 ≤ 3.8
OMU4 ≤7
Insertion loss OMU8 dB ≤ 11
OMU40 ≤ 6.5
OMU48 ≤ 6.5
Insertion loss difference dB ≤ 1.5
Adjacent channel isolation dB ≥ 25
Nonadjacent channel isolation dB ≥ 30
Integrated cross interference dB ≥ 23
-1 dB width nm ≥ 0.4
-20 dB width nm ≤ 1.2
Central wavelength shift nm ±0.05
9-44 Version: A
Table 9-98 Mechanical Parameters of OMU Series Cards
OMU8 368 × 30 0.9

OMU4 368 × 30 0.9
OMU2 368 × 30 0.9
OMU40 368 × 60 1.1
OMU48 368 × 60 1.1
Power Consumption
Table 9-99 Power Consumption of the OMU Series Cards
OMU48_E 15
OMU40_E 15
OMU48_O 15
OMU40_O 15
OMU2 2
OMU8 2
OMU4 2
9.7.2 Specification of the VMU Series Card
Table 9-100 Specifications of the VMU Series Cards

Insertion loss dB ≤7.5Note 1
Ripple dB ≤ 0.75
Adjacent channel isolation dB ≥25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB ≥30
Integrated cross interference dB ≥22
-1 dB spectrum width nm ≥0.4
-20 dB spectrum width nm ≤ 1.2
Version: A 9-45
Table 9-100 Specifications of the VMU Series Cards (Continued)

VOA attenuation range dB 0-10
VOA response time ms ≤ 10
VOA attenuation accuracy dB ±0.8
power-off attenuation value dB ≥10
Note 1: This item is the test value when the VOA attenuation value is set to 0dB. The VOA
attenuation value of each channel is set to 0dB by default before delivery, and users
can adjust the value according to the project requirement in practise.
Table 9-101 Mechanical Parameters of VMU Series Cards
VMU48 / 40 368×60 1.8
Power Consumption
Table 9-102 Power Consumption of the VMU Series Cards
VMU48_E 40
VMU40_E 40
VMU48_O 40
VMU40_O 40
9.7.3 Specifications of the ODU Series Card
Table 9-103 Specifications of the ODU Series Cards

ODU2 ≤ 3.8
Insertion loss ODU4 dB ≤7
ODU8 ≤ 11
9-46 Version: A
Table 9-103 Specifications of the ODU Series Cards (Continued)
ODU40 ≤ 6.5
ODU48 ≤ 6.5
Nonadjacent channel isolation dB ≥ 30
Integrated cross interference dB ≥ 23
-1 dB width nm ≥ 0.4
-20 dB width nm ≤ 1.2
Table 9-104 Mechanical Parameters of ODU Series Cards
ODU2 368 × 30 0.9

ODU4 368 × 30 0.9
ODU8 368 × 30 0.9
ODU40 368 × 60 1.1
ODU48 368 × 60 1.1
Power Consumption
Table 9-105 Power Consumption of the ODU Series Cards
ODU48_E 15
ODU40_E 15
ODU48_O 15
ODU40_O 15
ODU8 2
ODU4 2
ODU2 2
Version: A 9-47
9.7.4 Specifications of the ITL50 Card
Table 9-106 Specifications of the ITL50 Card
Wavelength range at C-band nm 1528 to 1568

Input optical power range dBm ≤ 27
Input signal wavelength spacing GHZ 50
Output signal wavelength
GHZ 100
spacing
Multiplexing
dB ≤4
direction
Insertion loss
Demultiplexing
dB ≤3
direction
Optical return loss dB 40
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB ≥ 25
Direction dB ≥ 55
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5
Maximum insertion loss
dB ≤1
difference between channels
PMD Ps ≤ 0.5
-1dB bandwidth nm ≥ 0.1
Device PMD Ps ≤ 0.5
Table 9-107 Mechanical Parameters of the ITL50 Card
ITL50 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-108 Power Consumption of the ITL50 Card
ITL50 1
9-48 Version: A
9.7.5 Specifications of the OSCAD Card
Table 9-109 Specifications of the OSCAD Card
Operating wavelength nm 1510 / 1550

Wavelength Passband nm 1500 to 1520
Range Reflex bandwidth nm 1528 to 1568
Transmission
dB ≤ 1.0
channelNote 1
Insertion loss
Reflection channelNote
2 dB ≤ 0.6
Transmission channel dB ≥ 44
Isolation
Reflection channel dB ≥ 22
Flatness dB ≤ 0.5
Insertion loss thermal stability dB/℃ ≤ 0.007
Direction dB ≥ 50
Polarization mode dispersion ps ≤ 0.10
Bearer optical power mW ≤ 300
Note 1: Transmission channel refers to the optical supervisory channel with the wavelength of
1510 nm.
Note 2: Reflection channel refers to the main optical channel with the wavelength of 1550 nm.
Table 9-110 Mechanical Parameters of the OSCAD Card
OSCAD 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-111 Power Consumption of the OSCAD Card
OSCAD 1
Version: A 9-49
9.7.6 Specifications of the WSS8M Card
Table 9-112 Specifications of the WSS8M Card
Channel spacing GHz 50 / 100

Dimension – 1×9
Isolation dB > 35
An/MI→LO dB < 6.5
Note 1
Insertion loss LI→LO dB < 13
LI→DROP dB < 3.5
LI→MO/EO dB < 7.5
Optical return loss dB > 40
Attenuation range dB 0 to 28
Note 1: To measure the insertion loss (LI→LO), connect the MI and MO ports of the card by
using an optical fiber.
Table 9-113 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8M Card
WSS8M 368×60
Power Consumption
Table 9-114 Power Consumption of the WSS8M Card
WSS8M 11
9-50 Version: A
9.7.7 Specifications of the WSS8D Card
Table 9-115 Specifications of the WSS8D Card
Channel spacing GHz 50 / 100

Dimension – 1×9
Isolation dB > 35
LI→Dn/MO dB < 6.5
Note 1
Insertion loss LI→LO dB < 13
MI/EI→LO dB < 7.5
ADD→LO dB < 3.5
Optical return loss dB > 40
Attenuation range dB 0 to 28
Note 1: To measure the insertion loss (LI→LO), connect the MI and MO ports of the card using
an optical fiber.
Table 9-116 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8D Card
WSS8D 368×60
Power Consumption
Table 9-117 Power Consumption of the WSS8D Card
WSS8D 11
Version: A 9-51
9.7.8 Specifications of the OA Card
Table 9-118 Specifications of the OA Card
Re-
mark
Optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568 –
Saturated output optical power dBm 21 24 –

18, 20, 23, 25, 18, 20, 23, 25,
Target gain dB –
27, 30, 33 27, 30, 33
Gain flatness dB ≤ 1.5 25°C
Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 5.5
–
DGV dB/dB ≤3
Output power (APR) dBm -1±0.5 –
Output power with no input power dBm 6±0.5 –

Input power monitoring range dBm -25 to 3
Output power monitoring range dBm -10 to 22
Split ratio at the output power
– 1% 0.5%
monitoring port
Power monitoring accuracy dB ±0.5

Optical power overshoot (at least
–
two channels with output power no dB ≤3
less than 7 dBm)
Nominal gain error range dB ±0.5

Error range of saturated output
dB 0.5
optical power
EVOA attenuation range dBm 1 to 25
Table 9-119 Mechanical Parameters of the OA Card
OA 368×30
OA 368×60
9-52 Version: A
Power Consumption
Table 9-120 Power Consumption of the OA Card
OA 20
9.7.9 Specifications of the PA Card
Table 9-121 Specifications of the PA Card
Item Unit Specification Remark

Optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568 –
Saturated output optical power dBm 14 13 –
10, 14, 17,
Target gain dB 25 –
20
Gain flatness dB ≤1 25°C
Valid noise figure dB ≤ 5.5
–
DGV dB/dB ≤3
Output power (APR) dBm -1±0.5 –
Output power with no input power dBm -16 to -12 –

Input power monitoring range dBm -33 to 0
Output power monitoring range dBm -15 to 15
Split ratio at the output power
– 1%
monitoring port
Power monitoring accuracy dB ±0.5

Optical power overshoot (at least
–
two channels with output power no dB ≤3
less than 7 dBm)
Nominal gain error range dB ±0.5

Error range of saturated output
dB 0.5
optical power
EVOA attenuation range dBm 1 to 25
Version: A 9-53
Table 9-122 Mechanical Parameters of the PA Card
PA 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-123 Power Consumption of the PA Card
PA 11
9.7.10 Specifications of the OCP Card
Table 9-124 Specifications of the OCP Card
Item Unit Specification Remark

IN→TXA, IN→TXB dB ≤ 4.5 Line 1, line 2
Insertion loss RXA→OUT,
dB ≤ 1.5 Line 1, line 2
RXB→OUT
Optical power
RXA/RXB dBm -30 to 20 Line 1, line 2
monitoring range
Optical power detection accuracy dBm ≤1 –
Protection switching time ms ≤ 30 –
Table 9-125 Mechanical Parameters of the OCP Card
OCP 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-126 Power Consumption of the OCP card
OCP 5
9-54 Version: A
9.7.11 Specifications of the OMSP Card
Table 9-127 Specifications of the OMSP Card
IN→WTX
dB ≤ 4.5
IN→PTX
Insertion loss
WRX→OUT
dB ≤ 1.5
PRX→OUT
Optical power
WRX/PRX dBm -30 to 20
monitoring range
Optical power detection accuracy dBm ≤1

Protection switching time ms ≤ 30
Table 9-128 Mechanical Parameters of the OMSP Card
Card Panel Dimension (Height × Width) (mm)
OMSP 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-129 Power Consumption of the OMSP card
OMSP 3.5
9.7.12 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card
Table 9-130 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card
OSC interface nm 1510±5

Operating LINE interface nm Standard wavelength of the C-band
wavelength 1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength of
MAIN interface nm
the C-band
Version: A 9-55
Table 9-130 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card (Continued)
1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength of

PROT interface nm
the C-band
OSC_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 5.5
OSC_I→PROT_O dB
MAIN_I→LINE_O dB
≤ 2.5
PROT_I→LINE_O dB
Insertion loss
LINE_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 5.5
LINE_I→PROT_O dB
MAIN_I→OSC_O dB
≤ 5.5
PROT_I→OSC_O dB
LINE-O (for the 1510
dB ≥ 15
nm signal)
Isolation
OSC-O (for the 1550
dB ≥ 30
nm signal)
PROT_I dBm -42 to -10

Input optical
MAIN-I (1510 nm) dBm -42 to -10
power range
MAIN-I (1550 nm) dBm -40 to 10
Optical power monitoring accuracy dBm ±1
Switching time ms ≤ 50
Table 9-131 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1+1) Card
OLP (1+1) 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-132 Power Consumption of the OLP (1+1) Card
OLP (1+1) 3
9-56 Version: A
9.7.13 Specifications of the OLP (1:1) Card
Table 9-133 Specifications of the OLP (1:1) Card
OSC interface nm 1510±5

Standard wavelength of the C-
LINE interface nm
band
Operating
1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength
wavelength MAIN interface nm
of the C-band
1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength
PROT interface nm
of the C-band
OSC_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 5.5
OSC_I→PROT_O dB
MAIN_I→LINE_O dB
≤ 2.5
PROT_I→LINE_O dB
Insertion loss
LINE_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 2.5
LINE_I→PROT_O dB
MAIN_I→OSC_O dB
≤ 5.5
PROT_I→OSC_O dB
LINE-O (for the 1510 nm
dB ≥ 15
signal)
Isolation
OSC-O (for the 1550 nm
dB ≥ 30
signal)
PROT_I dBm -42 to -10

Input optical
MAIN-I (1510 nm) dBm -42 to -10
power range
MAIN-I (1550 nm) dBm -40 to 10
Optical power monitoring accuracy dBm ±1
Switching time ms ≤ 50
Table 9-134 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1:1) Card
OLP (1:1) 368×30
Version: A 9-57
Power Consumption
Table 9-135 Power Consumption of the OLP (1:1) Card
OLP (1:1) 5
9.7.14 Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card
Table 9-136 Optical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card
Item Specification Remark

Line Rate 25.344 Mbit/s
–
Code 2B1H
Transmitting optical
-7 dBm to -2 dBm > 2 dBm for a long span module
power
Receiver sensitivity -45 dBm -48 dBm for a long span module
Input overload point -3 dBm -8 dBm for a long span module
-20 dB width 0.5 nm

Side mode suppression –
> 30 dB
ratio
1510 nm ± 5 nm (room 1510 nm ± 10 nm for a high
Operating wavelength
temperature) temperature (50℃)
Table 9-137 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card (2048 kbit/s)
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 2048 kbit/s

Bit rate accuracy ±50 ppm (±102.4 bit/s)
Code HDB3
Rectangular, conforming to the relevant mask in ITU-
Pulse shape
T G.703
Pair(s) in each direction One coaxial pair One symmetrical pair
Test load impedance 75 Ω 120 Ω

Nominal peak voltage of a mask
2.37V 3V
(pulse)
Peak voltage of a space (no pulse) 0±0.237 V 0±0.3V

Nominal pulse width 244 ns
9-58 Version: A
Table 9-137 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card (2048 kbit/s)
(Continued)
Item Specification
Ratio of the amplitudes of positive and

negative pulses at the center of the 0.95 to 1.05
pulse interval
Ratio of the widths of positive and

negative pulses at the nominal half 0.95 to 1.05
amplitude
Maximum peak-to-peak jitter at the

Compliant with ITU-T G.823
output port
Return loss in the following frequency ranges:

Return loss at the output port (dB) (51 kHz to 102 kHz) ≥ 6 dB
(102kHz to 3072kHz) ≥ 8 dB
Return loss in the following frequency ranges:

(51 kHz to 102 kHz) ≥ 12 dB
Return loss at the input port (dB)
(102kHz to 2048kHz) ≥ 18 dB
(2048kHz to 3072kHz) ≥ 14 dB
Attenuation at the input port 0 dB to 6 dB (1024 kHz)
Jitter tolerance at the input port Compliant with ITU-T G.823
Table 9-138 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card (2048 kHz)
Item Specification
Rectangular, conforming to the relevant mask in ITU-

Pulse shape
T G.703
Pair type Coaxial pair Symmetrical pair
Test load impedance 75 Ω 12 Ω

Maximum peak voltage (Vop) 1.5 1.9
Minimum peak voltage (Vop) 0.75 1.0
≤ 0.05 UIp-p (the measuring frequency range is f1 =
Output jitter
20 Hz to f4 = 100 kHz) (ITU-T G.813)
0 dB to 6 dB attenuation at 2048kHz according to

Attenuation at the input port
Return loss ≥ 15dB (at the frequency of 2048 kHz)
Version: A 9-59
Table 9-139 Clock Interface Specifications of the OSC (Electrical Layer) / EOSC Card
Clock Type Description
External clock synchronization source

One 120 ohm 2048 Kbit/s or 2048 kHz input
(W2M)
Synchronization output clock (W2M) One 120 ohm 2048 Kbit/s or 2048 kHz output
External time synchronization source

One 1PPS+TOD time signal input
(1PPS+TOD)
Synchronization output time (1PPS

One 1PPS+TOD time signal output
+TOD)
Table 9-140 GE Optical Interface Specifications of the OSC (Electrical Layer) / EOSC Card
Optical module type – 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-EX 1000BASE-ZX

Optical line code – NRZ NRZ NRZ
Operating
nm 1270 to 1355 1275 to 1350 1500 to 1580
Tra- wavelength range
nsm- Maximum mean
itter dBm -3 0 5
launched power
at
Minimum mean
re- dBm -8 -5 0
launched power
fer-
ence Minimum extinction
dB 9 9 9
point ratio
S Transmit signal eye

– Compliant with the IEEE802.3 template
pattern
Re- Minimum sensitivity

dBm -20 -23 -23
cei- (BER ≤ 10-12)
ver
at
re-
Minimum overload
fer- dBm -3 -3 -3
(BER ≤ 10-12)
ence
point
R
9-60 Version: A
Table 9-141 Mechanical Parameters of the OSC / EOSC Card
OSC (electrical layer) 307×30

OSC (optical layer) 368×30
EOSC 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-142 Power Consumption of the OSC / EOSC Card
OSC (electrical layer) 30

OSC (optical layer) 10
EOSC 30
9.7.15 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card
Table 9-143 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card
Monitoring channel quantity – 96

Central wavelength detection
dBm ±0.05
accuracy
Power detection accuracy dBm ±0.5

Dynamic range of the signal-to-
dB 10 to 25
noise ratio
Signal-to-noise ratio detection
dB ±1.5
accuracy
Monitoring optical interface

– 4/8
number
Version: A 9-61
Table 9-144 Mechanical Parameters of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card
OPM4 368×30
OPM8 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-145 Power Consumption of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card
OPM4 10
OPM8 10
9.8 Specifications of System Connection and

Management Cards
The following describes the specifications of the system connection and

management cards of the FONST 5000 U series of products.
9.8.1 Specifications of the CCU Card
Table 9-146 Mechanical Parameters of the CCU Card
CCU 307×27.5
Power Consumption
Table 9-147 Power Consumption of the CCU Card
CCU 56
9-62 Version: A
9.8.2 Specifications of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card
Table 9-148 Mechanical Parameters of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card
EMU 368×30
FCU 368×30
EFCU 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-149 Power Consumption of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card
EMU 22
FCU 22
EFCU 22
9.8.3 Specifications of the PWR Card
Table 9-150 Mechanical Parameters of the PWR Card
PWR (FONST 5000 U60) 247×30

PWR (FONST 5000 U60 2.0) 112×30
PWR (FONST 5000 U40/U30/U20/U10) 90×30
PWR (COTP 3030036) 190×30
PWR (COTP 3030105) 164×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-151 Power Consumption of the PWR Card
PWR (FONST 5000 U60) 30

PWR (FONST 5000 U60 2.0) 30
PWR (FONST 5000 U40/U30/U20/U10) 30
Version: A 9-63
Table 9-151 Power Consumption of the PWR Card (Continued)
PWR (COTP 3030036) 8

PWR (COTP 3030105) 8
9.8.4 Specifications of the Auxiliary Terminal Card
Table 9-152 Mechanical Parameters of the Auxiliary Terminal Card
AIF (FONST 5000 U60/U60 2.0) 307×27.5

AIF1/AIF2 (FONST 5000 U30/U20) 90.5×30
AIF1/AIF2 (FONST 5000 U40) 407×30
AIF (COTP) 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 9-153 Power Consumption of the Auxiliary Terminal Cards
AIF (FONST 5000 U60/U60 2.0) 5

AIF1 (FONST 5000 U30/U20) 5
AIF2 (FONST 5000 U30/U20) 5
AIF1 (FONST 5000 U40) 15
AIF2 (FONST 5000 U40) 5
AIF (COTP) 10
9.9 DCM Specifications
The following introduces the DCM specifications of the FONST 5000 U series of
products.
Optical lines with a rate of 10 Gbit/s or above are sensitive to dispersion. Therefore,
dispersion compensation is required for lines longer than a certain distance. A
compensation scheme can be selected based on Table 9-154 and Table 9-155.
9-64 Version: A
Table 9-154 G.652 Optical Fiber–DCM Specifications
Typical Maximum
Dispersion Polariza- Operating
Compensa- Maximum Input
Module Slope tion Wave-
tion Insertion PMD (ps) Power
Type Compensa- Dependent length
Distance Loss (dB) Allowed
tion Rate Loss (dB) Range (nm)
(km) (dBm)
1 20 3.3 0.4 0.1 20

2 40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
3 60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20 1528 to
90% to 110%
4 80 8 0.7 0.1 20 1568
5 100 9 0.8 0.1 20
6 120 9.8 0.3 0.1 20
Table 9-155 G.655 Optical Fiber–DCM Specifications
Typical Maximum
Dispersion Polariza-
Compensa- Maximum Input Operating
Module Slope tion
tion Insertion PMD (ps) Power Wavelength
Type Compensa- Dependent
Distance Loss (dB) Allowed Range (nm)
tion Rate Loss (dB)
(km) (dBm)
1 40 5 0.5 0.3 24
90% to 1528 to
2 80 8 0.7 0.3 24
110% 1568
3 120 9.8 0.9 0.3 24
Table 9-156 Mechanical Parameters of the DCM
Item Panel Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm)
DCM 50×491×270.5
9.10 Power Consumption of Cards
The following introduces the power supply and power consumption of the FONST
Power Consumption of Cards
Table 9-157 shows the power consumption of cards and fan units (measured at the
power supply of -48 V).
Version: A 9-65
Table 9-157 Power Consumption of Cards
Maximum Power
Type Card
Consumption (W)
8TN1 72
16TN1 (PMC) 80
16TN1 (microelectronic) 85
24TN1 95
32TN1 110
4TN2 120
8TN2 123
10TN2 125
12TN2 127
20TN2 145.6
10TP2 88
Electrical layer
20TP2 100
cards
1TO3 120
1TN3 110
2TN3 160
1TN4 120
2TN4 177
UXU2 120
4LN2 130
12LN2 140
20LN2 160
1LN4 185
2LN4 300
10IL2 130
BMD2 20
PIC cards
BMD2P 28
BMD2PP 36
OMU48_E 15
OMU48_O 15
VMU48_E 40
Optical layer VMU48_O 40

cards ODU48_E 15
ODU48_O 15
ITL50 1
OSCAD 1
9-66 Version: A
Table 9-157 Power Consumption of Cards (Continued)
Maximum Power
Type Card
Consumption (W)
WSS8M 11
WSS8D 11
OA 20
PA 11
OCP 5
OMSP 3.5
OLP (1+1) 3
OLP (1:1) 5
OSC 10
EOSC 30
OPM4 10
OPM8 10
CCU 56
EMU 22
FCU 22
EFCU 22
AIF (FONST 5000 U60/U60 2.0 subrack) 5
AIF1 (FONST 5000 U40 subrack) 15
System
AIF2 (FONST 5000 U40 subrack) 5
connection and
management AIF (COTP subrack) 10
unit AIF1 (FONST 5000 U30 / U20 subrack) 5
AIF2 (FONST 5000 U30 / U20 subrack) 5
PWR (FONST 5000 U60 subrack) 30
PWR (FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack) 30
PWR (FONST 5000 U40/U30/U20/U10 subrack) 30
PWR (COTP subrack) 8
Power consumption at
Fan unit for the FONST 5000 U60 / U60 2.0 / U40 room temperatureNote 1:
Fan unit / U30 / U20 / U10 subrack 50
(Each fan unit houses ten fans.) Maximum power
consumptionNote 2: 450
Version: A 9-67
Table 9-157 Power Consumption of Cards (Continued)
Maximum Power
Type Card
Consumption (W)
room temperatureNote 1:
Fan unit for the COTP (3030036) subrack
3
(three independent fan units)
Maximum power
room temperatureNote 1:
Fan unit for the COTP (3030105) subrack
100
(Each fan unit houses ten fans.)
Maximum power
Note 1: Power consumption at room temperature refers to the power consumption generated
when the equipment using typical service configuration operates at room temperature
(23±2℃) and fans operate at the duty cycle of 30%.
Note 2: Maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption generated when the
equipment using the maximum power consumption configuration operates at the high
temperature (>45℃) and fans operate at the maximum speed.
9.11 Mechanical Dimensions
Table 9-158, Table 9-159 and Table 9-160 show the dimensions of the cabinets,
subracks and cards used by the FONST 5000 U series of products respectively.
Table 9-158 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cabinets
Item Dimension (H × W × D) (mm)
1600 mm high cabinet (680 mm deep) 1600×600×680


9-68 Version: A
Table 9-159 Mechanical Dimensions of the Subracks
Item Dimension (H × W × D) (mm)
PDP (3000064) 150×530×145.8

PDP (3000068) 100×530×157.5
PDP (3000082) 150×530×127.8
FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack 1575×563×570
FONST 5000 U60 subrack 1447×563×570
FONST 5000 U40 subrack 1166×566×570
FONST 5000 U30 subrack 1677×566×295
FONST 5000 U20 subrack 1152×566×295
FONST 5000 U10 subrack 535×566×295
COTP (3030036) subrack 520.5×555×280.2
COTP (3030105) subrack 512.5×555×280.2
40×484.3×279
Fan unit for the subracks 70×160×240 (COTP (3030036))
61×484.3×255.3 (COTP (3030105))
DCM slide rail 50×491×270.5
Table 9-160 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cards
Type Card Panel Dimension (H × W) (mm)
8TN1 407×30
16TN1 407×30
24TN1 407×30
32TN1 407×30
4TN2 407×30
8TN2 407×30
10TN2 407×30
12TN2 407×30
20TN2 407×30
Electrical layer cards
10TP2 407×30
20TP2 407×30
1TO3 407×30
1TN3 407×30
2TN3 407×30
1TN4 407×30
2TN4 407×60
UXU2 (FONST 5000
352×55
U60/U60 2.0 subrack)
Version: A 9-69
Table 9-160 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cards (Continued)
UXU2 (FONST 5000

U40/U30/20/U10 352×30
subrack)
4LN2 407×30
12LN2 407×30
20LN2 407×30
1LN4 407×30
2LN4 407×60
10IL2 407×30
BMD2 407×30
PIC cards
BMD2P 407×30
BMD2PP 407×30
OMU48_E 368×60
OMU48_O 368×60
VMU48_E 368×60
VMU48_O 368×60
ODU48_E 368×60
ODU48_O 368×60
ITL50 368×30
OSCAD 368×30
WSS8M 368×60
WSS8D 368×60
Optical layer cards OA 368×30
OA 368×60
PA 368×30
OCP 368×30
OMSP 368×30
OLP (1+1) 368×30
OLP (1:1) 368×30
OSC 368×30
EOSC 368×30
OPM4 368×30
OPM8 368×30
CCU 307×27.5
System connection and
EMU 368×30
management unit
FCU 368×30
9-70 Version: A
Table 9-160 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cards (Continued)
EFCU 368×30
PWR (FONST 5000
307×27.5
U60 2.0 subrack)
AIF (FONST 5000 U40

407×30
subrack)
AIF (COTP subrack) 368×30

AIF1/AIF2 (FONST
90.5×30
5000 U30/20 subrack)
PWR (FONST 5000

247×30
U60 subrack)
PWR (FONST 5000

112×30
U60 2.0 subrack)
PWR (FONST 5000

U40/U30/20/U10 90×30
subrack)
PWR (COTP subrack) 190×30
Version: A 9-71
10 Equipment Standards and
Environmental Requirements
The following describes the equipment standards and environmental requirements

for the FONST 5000 U series of products.
Optical Interface Performance Standards
Power Supply Requirements
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Environment Requirements
Version: A 10-1
10.1 Optical Interface Performance Standards
u SDH: ITU-T G.957 and G.691
u SONET: GR-253-CORE, GR-1377-CORE, and ANSI T1.105
u OTN: ITU-T G.709 and ITU-T G.959.1
u 10GE: IEEE 802.3ae
u GE: IEEE 802.3az
u ESCON: ANSI X3.296 and ANSI X3.230
u FC: ANSI X3.303 and ANSI X3.230
u Optical fiber connector: LC/PC and LSH/APC
u Laser safety: ITU-T G.664 compliant and automatic laser shutdown supported
u All optical interfaces of the equipment are provided with anti-dust caps.
10.2 Power Supply Requirements
u Dual-backup protection is required for the DC power supply. When a power rail
is interrupted, no services on the equipment will be affected, but a single power
rail interruption alarm will be generated.
u DC voltage: -40 V DC/-57 V DC
u Voltage range: -40 V DC to -72.0 V DC
u The working ground and protection ground must be independent from each
other.
10.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility
The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) complies with the ETS 300 386, including
u Radiated emission: EN55022
u Conducted emission: EN55022
u Electronic static discharge (ESD): IEC61000-4-2
u Conducted susceptibility: IEC61000-4-6
10-2 Version: A
10 Equipment Standards and Environmental Requirements
u Electrical fast transient (EFT): IEC61000-4-4
u Radiated susceptibility: IEC61000-4-3
u Surge: IEC61000-4-5
u Voltage dip and short interruption: IEC61000-4-29
10.4 Environment Requirements
Environment requirements involve the storage environment, transportation

environment, and working environment.
10.4.1 Storage Environment
u Climate
Table 10-1 shows the climate requirements for the storage environment.
Table 10-1 Climate Requirements (Storage Environment)
Item Specification
Altitude ≤ 3000m
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature -40℃ to +70℃ (-55℃ to +50℃ in East Europe and Russia)
Temperature gradient ≤ 1℃/min

Relative humidity 5% to 95%
Condensation Not allowed
Rainwater Equipment package must be protected against rainwater.
Icing Allowed
Solar radiation ≤ 1120W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600W/s2
Air speed ≤ 30m/s
u Air cleanliness
4 The air must be free of explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive,

or corrosive dust.
4 Table 10-2 shows the concentration requirements for mechanically active

substances.
Version: A 10-3
Table 10-2 Concentration Requirements for Mechanically Active Substances (Storage

Environment)
Mechanically Active Substance Specification
Suspension density ≤ 5 mg/m3
Subsidence rate ≤ 20 mg/(m2h)
Gravel ≤ 300mg/m3
4 The concentration of the chemically active substances meets the

requirements specified in Table 10-3.
Table 10-3 Concentration Requirements for Chemically Active Substances (Storage

Environment)
Chemically Active Substance Content (mg/m3)
SO2 ≤ 0.30
H2S ≤ 0.10
NO2 ≤ 0.50
NH3 ≤ 1.00
Cl2 ≤ 0.10
HCl ≤ 0.10
HF ≤ 0.01
O3 ≤ 0.05
u Biological environment
4 Microbe such as fungus and mould must be avoided.
4 Rodents such as mice must be prevented.
u Mechanical environment
4 The sinusoidal vibration meets requirements listed in Table 10-4.
Table 10-4 Sinusoidal Vibration Requirements (Storage Environment)
Frequency range (Hz) Displacement (mm) Acceleration (m/s2)
2 to 9 3.5 –
9 to 200 – 10
200 to 500 – 15
4 Impact: not allowed
4 Static pile load: ≤5kPa
10-4 Version: A
10.4.2 Transportation Environment
u Climate
Table 10-5 shows the climate requirements during equipment transportation.
Table 10-5 Climate Requirements (Transportation Environment)
Item Specification
Altitude ≤ 3000m
Temperature -40℃ to +70℃ (-55℃ to +50℃ in East Europe and Russia)
Temperature gradient ≤ 0.5℃/min

Relative humidity 5% to 95%
Rain and snow Not allowed
Icing Not allowed
Solar radiation ≤ 1120W/s2
Air speed ≤ 30m/s
u Air cleanliness

or corrosive dust.

substances.
Table 10-6 Concentration Requirements for Mechanically Active Substances (Transportation

Environment)
Suspension density None
Subsidence rate ≤ 20 mg/(m2h)
Gravel ≤ 300mg/m3

Version: A 10-5
Table 10-7 Concentration Requirements for Chemically Active Substances (Transportation

Environment)
SO2 ≤ 1.00
H2S ≤ 0.50
NO2 ≤ 1.00
NH3 ≤ 3.00
Cl2 None
HCl ≤ 0.50
HF ≤ 0.03
O3 ≤ 0.10
Salt mist Not allowed
Table 10-8 shows the mechanical requirements during equipment

transportation.
Table 10-8 Mechanical Requirements (Transportation Environment)
Item Sub-item Specification
Frequency range (Hz) 2 to 9 9 to 200 200 to 500

Sinusoidal
Displacement (mm) 3.5 – –
vibration
Acceleration (m/s2) – 10 15
Random Frequency range (Hz) 10 to 200 200 to 2000 –

vibration 2 3
ASD (m /s ) 1 0.3 –
Response spectrum type Type II
Nonstatic-state 2
Acceleration (m/s ) 250
impact
Period (ms) 6
Drop type Free drop
Drop Weight (kg) < 20 20 to 100 > 100

Drop height (mm) 1200 1000 250
Package tilt or overturn Not allowed
Static pile load ≤ 10 kPa
10-6 Version: A
10.4.3 Working Environment
u Climate
Table 10-9 shows the climate requirements for the working environment.
Table 10-9 Climate Requirements (Working Environment)
Item Specification
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Long-term
5℃ to 45℃
Tempera- operation
ture Short-term
-5℃ to 50℃
operation
Temperature gradient ≤ 0.5℃/min

Long-term
5% to 85%
Relative operation
humidity Short-term
5% to 95%
operation

Rain and snow Not allowed
Icing Not allowed
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s2
Air speed ≤ 5 m/s
Note 1: When the altitude is higher than 1800 m, the operation temperature of the equipment
decreases by 1℃ each time the altitude increases by 220 m.
u Air cleanliness

or corrosive dust.

substances.
Version: A 10-7
Table 10-10 Concentration Requirements for Mechanically Active Substances (Working

Environment)
Suspension density ≤ 20 mg/m3
Subsidence rate ≤ 1.5 mg/(m2h)
Gravel ≤ 30 mg/m3

Table 10-11 Concentration Requirements for Chemically Active Substances (Working

Environment)
SO2 ≤ 0.30
H2S ≤ 0.10
NO2 ≤ 0.50
NH3 ≤ 1.00
Cl2 ≤ 0.10
HCl ≤ 0.10
HF ≤ 0.01
O3 ≤ 0.05
Salt mist Not allowed
Table 10-12 shows the mechanical requirements for the working environment.
Table 10-12 Mechanical Requirements (Working Environment)
Frequency range (Hz) 2 to 9 9 to 200
Sinusoidal vibration Displacement (mm) 1.5 –

Acceleration (m/s2) – 5
Response spectrum type Type II
Unsteady-state
Acceleration (m/s2) 250
impact
Period (ms) 6
10-8 Version: A
Table 10-12 Mechanical Requirements (Working Environment) (Continued)
Floor bearing ≥ 600kg/m2
Grounding resistance ≤5Ω
Version: A 10-9
11 Product Safety Standards
The following introduces the safety standards of the FONST 5000 U series of
products.
Relevant ITU-T Standards
Relevant IEEE Standards
Laser Safety Standards
Relevant Safety Standards
Relevant EMC Standards
Relevant Environment Standards
Grounding Standards
Noise Standards
Fire Prevention Standards
Relevant International Standards
Version: A 11-1
11.1 Relevant ITU-T Standards

Architecture Standard
Architecture Standard Description
Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous

ITU-T G.803
Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
Types and characteristics of SDH network protection

ITU-T G.841
architectures
ITU-T G.842 Interworking of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.871 Framework for optical transport network Recommendations
ITU-T G.872 Architecture of optical transport networks
Physical-layer Feature Standard
Physical-layer Feature
Description
Standard
Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical
ITU-T Rec.G.692
amplifiers
ITU-T Rec.G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
ITU-T Rec.G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
ITU-T Rec.G.696.1 Intra-Domain DWDM applications
Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital

ITU-T Rec.G.703
interfaces
Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the
ITU-T G.957
synchronous digital hierarchy
Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH

ITU-T G.691
systems with optical amplifiers
ITU-T G.693 Optical interfaces for intra-office systems
ITU-T G.697 Optical monitoring for DWDM systems
Amplified multichannel DWDM applications with single channel

ITU-T G.698.2
optical interfaces
Transmission characteristics of optical components and

ITU-T G.671
subsystems
ITU-T G.959.1 Optical transport network physical layer interfaces
Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters

ITU-T G.661
of optical amplifiers and subsystems
ITU-T G.662 Generic characteristics of optical amplifiers and subsystems
11-2 Version: A
Physical-layer Feature
Description
Standard
Application related aspects of optical amplifiers and sub-
ITU-T G.663
systems
Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical

ITU-T G.664
transport systems
Generic Characteristics of Raman Amplifiers and Raman

ITU-T G.665
Amplified Subsystems
Structure and Mapping Standard
Structure and Mapping

Description
Standard
ITU-T G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448

ITU-T G.704
and 44736 Kbit/s hierarchical levels
Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy
ITU-T Rec.G.707
(SDH)
ITU-T Rec.G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
ITU-T Rec.G.7041/Y.1303 Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)
Equipment Function and Feature Standard
Equipment Function and

Description
Feature Standard
Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.783
equipment functional blocks
Characteristics of optical transport network hierarchy

ITU-T G.798
equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
ITU-T G.975 Forward error correction for submarine systems
Forward error correction for high bit rate DWDM submarine

ITU-T G.975.1
systems
ITU-T Rec.G.781 Synchronization layer functions
ITU-T Rec.G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
ITU-T Rec.Q.812 Protocol profile for electronic communications interactive agent
International multi-operator paths, sections and transmission

ITU-T Rec.M.2120
systems fault detection and localization procedures
Version: A 11-3
Network Protection Standard

Network Protection
Description
Standard
Generic protection switching–Linear trail and subnetwork
ITU-T G.808.1
protection
ITU-T G.873.1 Optical Transport Network (OTN):Linear protection
Jitter and Performance Standard

Jitter and Performance
Description
Standard
The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which
ITU-T G.823
are based on the 2048 Kbit/s hierarchy

ITU-T G.824
are based on the 1544 Kbit/s hierarchy

ITU-T G.825
are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

ITU-T G.826
constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate
Error performance limits and procedures for bringing-into-

ITU-T M.2401 service and maintenance of multi operator international paths
and sections within an optical transport network
Error performance parameters and objectives for multi-operator

ITU-T G.8201
international paths within the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

ITU-T Rec.G.828
constant bit rate synchronous digital paths
Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator

ITU-T Rec.G.829
sections
The control of jitter and wander within the optical transport
ITU-T Rec.G.8251
network (OTN)
Equipment Management Standard
Equipment Management
Description
Standard
Equipment Management Function (EMF) requirements that are
ITU-T G.7710
common to multiple transport technologies
Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of

ITU-T G.773
transmission systems
11-4 Version: A
Equipment Management
Description
Standard
Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Bidirectional performance
ITU-T Rec.G.774.1
monitoring for the network element view
Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Configuration of the

ITU-T Rec.G.774.2
payload structure for the network element view
Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of multiplex-

ITU-T Rec.G.774.3
section protection for the network element view
Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of the

ITU-T Rec.G.774.4
subnetwork connection protection for the network element view
Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of

ITU-T Rec.G.774.5 connection supervision functionality (HCS/LCS) for the network
element view
Loss of Signal (LOS), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and
ITU-T Rec.G.775 Remote Defect Indication (RDI) defect detection and clearance
criteria for PDH signals
ITU-T G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
Management capabilities of transport networks based on the

ITU-T G.831
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.870/Y.1352 Terms and definitions for Optical Transport Networks (OTN)
ITU-T G.874 Management aspects of the optical transport network element
Optical transport network (OTN) management information

ITU-T G.875
model for the network element view
ITU-T M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network
ITU-T Rec.Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3 and X interfaces
Information Technology - Open Systems Interconnection -

ITU-T Rec.X.721 Structure of Management Information: Definition of
Management Information
11.2 Relevant IEEE Standards

Relevant IEEE Standard Description
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection

IEEE Std 802.3
(CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification
Media Access Control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer,

IEEE 802.3z
repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation
Media Access Control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, and

IEEE 802.3ae
management parameters for 10 Gbit/s operation
Version: A 11-5
11.3 Laser Safety Standards

Laser Safety Standard Description
Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification,

IEC 60825-1
requirements and user's guide
Safety of laser products - Part2: Safety of optical fiber

IEC 60825-2
communication systems
ANSI CDRH 21-CFR-1040 Optical Safety
11.4 Relevant Safety Standards

Relevant Safety Standard Description
IEC 60215 Safety requirements for radio transmitting equipment
Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including

EN 60950-1
Electrical Business Equipment

IEC 60950-1
Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected

IEC41003 to telecommunication networks and/or a cable distribution
system

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 60950-1
UL 1950 Information Technology Equipment - Safety
Earthling and Bonding of Telecommunications Equipment in

EN 300 253
Telecommunication Centers
Approval and test specification – safety of information
AS/NZ 3260 technology equipment including electrical business
equipment

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 60950-1
3rd edition Safety of Information Technology Equipment

UL 60950-1
Including Electrical Business Equipment
Guide on the effects of current passing through the human

IEC Publication 479-1
body
Guide on the effects of current passing through the human

IS 8437 {1993}
body
Safety of information technology equipment including

IS 13252 {1993}
electrical business equipment
11-6 Version: A
11.5 Relevant EMC Standards

Relevant EMC Standard Description
Testing and measurement techniques of electrostatic discharge

IEC Publication 1000-4-2
immunity test
IEC Publication 4/3/1000 Radiated RF electromagnetic field immunity test
Testing and measurement techniques of electrical fast

IEC Publication 4/4/1000
transients/burst immunity test
IEC Publication 4/6/1000 Immunity to conducted disturbances
Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance

EN 55022
characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
Information technology equipment-Immunity characteristics-
EN 55024
Limits and methods of measurement
Testing and measurement techniques - Electrostatic discharge
IEC 61000-4-2
immunity test
Testing and measurement techniques – Radiated, radio-

IEC 61000-4-3
frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test
Testing and measurement techniques – Electrical fast

IEC 61000-4-4
transient/burst immunity test
IEC 61000-4-5 Testing and measurement techniques – Surge immunity test
Testing and measurement techniques – Immunity to conducted

IEC 61000-4-6
disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
Testing and measurement techniques – Voltage dips, short

IEC 61000-4-11
interruptions and voltage variations immunity tests
Testing and measurement techniques – Voltage dips, short

IEC 61000-4-29
interruptions
Electromagnetic compatibility and electrical safety - generic

GR-1089-CORE
criteria for network telecommunications equipment
11.6 Relevant Environment Standards

Relevant Environment
Description
Standard
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters

ETSI EN 300 386 (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements
Class 1.1: Weather-protected, partly temperature-controlled

ETS 300 019-1-1
storage locations
Version: A 11-7
Relevant Environment
Description
Standard
Class 1.2: Weather protected, not temperature-controlled
storage locations
ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.2 Partly temperature-controlled location
Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements:

NEBS GR-63-CORE
Physical Protection
Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substance in

ROHS
electrical and electronic equipment
The equipment complies with the RoHS Directive. Table 11-1 describes the
materials of each part.
Table 11-1 Component Materials
Compo- Percentage (Based RoHS

Material Weight
nent on Product Weight) Material
Fe 56 28.10% None
Al 3 1.50% None
Cabinet Cu 2 1.00% None
ABS 3 1.50% None
Other materials 2 1.00% None
Fe 26 13.00% None
Subrack ABS 0.3 0.15% None
Zn 0.15 0.08% None
Typical configuration (power
cable, ground cable, alarm
7 3.51% None
cable, management cable, and
Cable
clock cable)
Other configurations (weight per 1.5

- None
meter) kg/m
Typical configuration (fifty-eight

Pigtail 30 15.04% None
10-meter optical fibers)
Full configuration (including the Pb (for

Card 70 35.10%
components and 44 cards) soldering)
Total Typical configuration 199.45 100% –
11-8 Version: A
11.7 Grounding Standards

Grounding Standard Description
Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in

ETS 300 253
telecommunication centres
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety - Generic
GR 1089 CORE
Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment
11.8 Noise Standards

Noise Standard Description
ETS 300 753 Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment
11.9 Fire Prevention Standards

Fire Prevention Standard Description
EN 60950 (Europe) Safety of information technology equipment
ANSI/UL 60950 Safety of information technology equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.950-95
Audio, Video and Similar Electronic Equipment
(North America)
IEC 60950 (International) Safety of information technology equipment
73/23/EEC (Europe) Low Voltage Directive
11.10 Relevant International Standards

Relevant International
Description
Standard
Optical amplifiers–Part 4: Multichannel Applications
IEC 61291-1
Performance specification Template
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1-M94 Audio, Video and Similar Electronic Equipment
73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures.

IEC 529
(IP Code)
Television—SDTV1 Digital Signal/Data — Serial Digital

SMPTE 259M
Interface
SMPTE 424M Television—3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface
Version: A 11-9
Relevant International
Description
Standard
Television—Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition
SMPTE 292M
Television Systems
Cable networks for television signals, sound signals and

interactive services—Part 9: Interfaces for CATV/SMATV
CENELEC EN 50083-9
headends and similar professional equipment for DVB/MPEG-2
transport streams
ISO 9314 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)
11-10 Version: A
Appendix A Abbreviations
ACB Air Circuit Breaker

ACL Access Control List
APD Avalanche Photon Diode
API Access Point Identifier
APR Automatic Power Reduction
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
BC Boundary Clock
BDI Backward Defect Indicator

BFD Bidirectional Forwarding Detection
BMC Best Master Clock

BMU Board Management Unit
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BRAS Broadband Remote Access Server

CAR Committed Access Rate
CBS Committed Burst Size
CCM Continuity Check Message
CD Chromatic Dispersion
CE Customer Edge
CFM Connectivity Fault Management
CIR Committed Information Rate

CR Core Router
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CV Connectivity Verification
DAPI Destination Access Point Identifier

DCC Data Communication Channel
DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN Data Communication Network

DDF Digital Distribution Frame
DGE Dynamic Gain Equalization
DiffServ Differentiated Services
Version: A A-1
DoS Denial of Service

DPA Dynamic Power Adjustment
DPSK Differential Phase Shift Keying
DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
DSP Digital Signal Processing
DTE Data Terminating Entity
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E2ETC End-to-End Transparent Clock
ECC Embedded Communication Channel

EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile

ESC Electrical Supervisory Channel
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVOA Electrical Variable Optical Attenuator
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forward Error Correction
FOADM Fixed Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
GCC General Communication Channel

GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GMC Grandmaster Clock

GMPLS Generalized Multiprotocol Label Switching
GPS Global Positioning System
IC Integrated Circuit
ID Identity
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IP Internet Protocol
ISP Internet Service Provider
International Telecommunication Union–Telecommunication
ITU-T
Standardization Sector
L2VPN Layer 2 Virtual Private Network
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG Link Aggregation
A-2 Version: A
LAN Local Area Network

LCT Local Craft Terminal
LPT Link State Pass Through
LSA Link State Advertisement

LTE Long Term Evolution
MA Maintenance Association
MAC Media Access Control
MCC Management Communication Channel
MCF Message Communication Function
MCN Management Communication Network
MD Maintenance Domain
MDF Main Distribution Frame
MEG Maintenance Entity Group
MEP Maintenance End Point

MIB Management Information Base
MIMO Multiple-Input Multiple-Output
MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point

MME Mobility Management Entity
MP Maintenance Point
MPLS Multi-Protocol Label Switching
MS-OTN Multi-Service Optical Transport Network
MSTP Multi-Service Transport Platform
NNI Network Node Interface

NTP Network Time Protocol
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OC Ordinary Clock
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
OFDM Optical Frequency Division Multiplexing
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
OLT Optical Line Terminal
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel
OSNR Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
Version: A A-3
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
OTN Optical Transport Network
OTS Optical Transmission Section
OTU Optical Transponder Unit
P2PTC Peer-to-Peer Transparent Clock
PBS Peak Burst Size

PC Personal Computer
PCS Physical Coding Sublayer
PDP Power Distribution Panel

PDU Protocol Data Unit
PE Provider Edge
PHB Per-Hop Behavior
PIN Positive-Intrinsic-Negative
PIR Peak Information Rate

PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion
PMDC Polarization Mode Dispersion Compensation
POTS Packet Optical Transport System
PRC Primary Reference Clock
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PTN Packet Transport Network
PTP Precision Time Protocol

PW Pseudo Wire
QoS Quality of Service
QSFP Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable
RDI Remote Defect Indication

RNC Radio Network Controller
ROADM Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplex
RRC Radio Resource Control

SAN Storage Area Network
SAPI Source Access Point Identifier

SAR Segmentation And Reassembly
SC Switched Connection
SCC Signaling Communication Channel
SCN Signaling Communication Network
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable
A-4 Version: A
SGW Signaling Gateway
SN Serial Number
SNCP Sub-network Connection Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SP Strict Priority
SPC Soft Permanent Connection

SR Service Router
SSM Synchronization Status Message
STM Synchronous Transport Module
TC Transparent Clock
TCM Tandem Connection Monitor

TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TDCM Tunable Dispersion Compensation Module
TDM Time-Division Multiplexing
TE Traffic Engineering
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch

TM Terminal Multiplexer
TMUX Trans-Multiplexer
TTI Trail Trace Identifier

TTL Time To Live
UCT Coordinated Universal Time
ULH Ultra Long Haul
UNI User Network Interface

VGA Variable Gain Amplifier
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
WAN Wide Area Network

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing
WRED Weighted Random Early Detection
WSS Wavelength Selective Switch
XFP 10-Gigabit Small Form-factor Pluggable
Version: A A-5
Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survey
Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to
complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your
responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for
no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.
Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Company
To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete
documentation set.
Documentation Name
Code and Version
Usage of the product documentation:

1. How often do you use the documentation?
□ Frequently □ Rarely □ Never □ Other (please specify)
2. When do you use the documentation?
□ in starting up a project □ in installing the product □ in daily maintenance □ in trouble
shooting □ Other (please specify)
3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the
documentation?
□ 100% □ 80% □ 50% □ 0% □ Other (please specify)
4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?
□ Satisfied □ Unsatisfied (your advice)
5. Which documentation form do you prefer?
□ Print edition □ Electronic edition □ Other (please specify)
Quality of the product documentation:
1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?
□ Very □ Somewhat □ Not at all (your advice)
2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?
□ Good □ Normal □ Poor (please specify)
3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?
4. Is the information complete in the documentation?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for
you to get known and use the product?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?
□ Yes (Please give an example)
□ No (Please specify the reason)
7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?
8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?
9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?
□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)
□ Practical □ Unpractical (your advice)
10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?

□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)
11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare
our documentation to them?
Product documentations from other companies:
Satisfied (please specify)
Unsatisfied (please specify)
12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:
Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information
included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at
edit@fiberhome.com

Manual 2 Fiberhome

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Manual 2 Fiberhome

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual 2 Fiberhome

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FONST 5000 U Series

Packet Enhanced OTN Equipment

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be

Describes the equipment’s structures, functions, signal

FONST 5000 U Series Packet

Introduces the rules and methods for the configuration of

FONST 5000 U Series Packet Gives a detailed introduction to notices of fault

FONST 5000 U Series Packet

Introduces the functions of the PDP (3000068); briefs how

Introduces the functions of the PDP (3000082); briefs how

Quick Installation Guide for the

Quick Installation Guide for the

Packet Enhanced OTN Introduces functions, related concepts, configuration

This manual is intended for the following readers:

u Planning and designing engineers

u Operation and maintenance engineers

To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:

u Data communication technology

u Optical fiber communication technology

u SDH communication theory

OTNM2000 FiberHome e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management System

8TN1 8-Port 2.5G Normalization Service Card

UXU2 Universal Switch Unit 2

OTU2E Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with Enhanced FEC

OTU2S 10G Bidirectional Optical Transponder Card with Super FEC

2-Port 10G Bidirectional Optical Transponder Card with

OTU2F 10G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC

OTU3S 43G Bidirectional Transponder Card with Super FEC

43G Bidirectional Transponder Card with Super FEC

OTU3F 43G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC

OTU4S 100Gb/s Enhanced FEC Unit (PM-QPSK)

100G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with Enhanced

OTU4F 100G Regenerator with EFEC

BMD2 Band Multiplexer and Distribution Unit (2 Band)

BMD2P 2 Bands Multiplexer and Distribution Unit with Pre amplifiers

BMD2PP 2 Bands Multiplexer and Distribution Unit with 2 Preamplifiers

OMU48_E 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)

OMU40_E 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)

ODU48_E 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)

ODU40_E 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)

48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

OMU48_O 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C, O)

OMU40_O 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C, O)

ODU48_O 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)

ODU40_O 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)

48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

OMU8 8 Ch Optical Coupler Card

ODU8 8 Ch Optical Splitter Card

OMU4 4 Ch Optical Coupler Card

ODU4 4 Ch Optical Splitter Card